JP7825875B2 - gaming machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

Conventionally, some gaming machines have used an effect in which multiple symbols are displayed in a varying manner on the display unit, followed by a static display. Furthermore, as described in Patent Document 1 below, such gaming machines sometimes use a reach formation effect in which some symbols form a reach, as an effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot.

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2020-81412

However, as mentioned above, there is room for improvement in gaming machines capable of executing reach formation effects to make them more entertaining.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above circumstances. Its objective is to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming through its presentation.

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A game control means capable of creating an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance using an image display unit capable of displaying a predetermined performance image on a display unit,
The performance execution means
A plurality of symbols are displayed in different regions of the display unit, and then a variable effect of stopping the display can be executed.
During the variation performance, a reach formation performance may be executed in which only one reach is formed by a part of the plurality of symbols,
In the reach formation performance, there are times when a reach line capable of indicating the formation of a reach is displayed in a specific manner and times when it is displayed in a non-specific manner different from the specific manner,
As the reach formation performance,
When a specific reach formation effect is executed in which the reach line of the specific mode is displayed at a position away from the center of the pattern related to the formation of the reach, thereby suggesting a specific expectation level as the expectation level of the advantageous game state;
This gaming machine may suggest a degree of expectation different from the specific degree of expectation by executing a non-specific reach formation effect in which the reach line of the non-specific mode is displayed at a position closer to the center of the pattern related to the formation of a reach than the specific reach formation effect.

The present invention provides a gaming machine that can increase gaming interest through presentation.

FIG. FIG. A front view showing the second large prize device and other details. FIG. (A) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the below-board movable device are in standby state, and (B) is a front view of the performance unit when the above-board movable device and the below-board movable device are activated. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the sub-control board. (A) is a table showing random numbers related to the general map, and (B) is a table showing random numbers related to the special map. (A) is an example of a hit determination table, (B) is an example of a normal game fluctuation pattern determination table, and (C) is an example of an auxiliary game control table. (A) is an example of a jackpot determination table, (B) is an example of a jackpot symbol type determination table, and (C) is an example of a reach determination table. This is an example of a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table. This is an example of a special chart 2 variation pattern determination table. 10 is an example of a look-ahead determination table. 10 is an example of a jackpot game control table. FIG. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of normal fluctuations in special chart fluctuation effects. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of N reach in the special chart change performance. This is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an SP reach in the special chart change performance. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a hold effect. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a movable object effect. FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an operation presentation. 10 is a flowchart of a main control process. 10 is a flowchart of a main-side timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a sub-control main process. 10 is a flowchart of a 1 ms timer interrupt process. 10 is a flowchart of a 10 ms timer interrupt process. (A) is an example of a jackpot determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is an example of a jackpot pattern type determination table according to the first embodiment, (C) is an example of a losing pattern type determination table according to the first embodiment, and (D) is an example of a reach determination table according to the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a jackpot symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment, which is a table explaining the types of jackpots. 10 is an example of a losing symbol type determination table according to the first embodiment, which is a table for explaining types of losing symbols. (A) is an example of a normal pattern hit determination table according to the first embodiment, (B) is an example of a normal pattern change pattern determination table according to the first embodiment, and (C) is an example of an electric chute opening pattern determination table according to the first embodiment. 1 is an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for a non-time-saving state according to the first embodiment. 1 is an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving state A according to the first embodiment. 1 is an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving state C according to the first embodiment. 1 is an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for the time-saving state CL according to the first embodiment. This is an example of a start winning command identification table according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a power-on process in a main control main process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a sensor detection process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a gate passing process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a special action process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol waiting process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a fluctuation pattern determination process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of processing during special pattern fluctuation according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of the game status management process at the end of the special pattern variation according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a game status management process when a special pattern is determined according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of the special electric device processing according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a game status setting process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a power-on process in the sub-control main process according to the first embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of a received command analysis process according to the first embodiment. This is a flowchart of the special chart 1 change recommendation display processing related to the first embodiment. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a game flow according to the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a ground background mode according to the first embodiment. 10A and 10B are diagrams illustrating the presentation modes related to the time-saving state in the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a launch base background mode according to the first embodiment. 10A to 10C are diagrams illustrating the transition of presentations from the launch base background mode according to the first embodiment. 10 is an example of a losing symbol type determination table according to the second embodiment, which is a table explaining the types of losing symbols. This is an example of a start winning command identification table according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a game flow according to the second embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of the game status management process at the end of the special pattern variation according to the third embodiment. 10 is a flowchart of the game status management process when a special pattern is determined according to the third embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a game flow according to the third embodiment. A flowchart of prize ball related processing in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating the unpaid indicator display in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a payout completion display according to the fourth embodiment. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating other examples of the unpaid indicator display and the paid-out completion display according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a standby state in which none of the movable bodies relating to the above-board movable device and the below-board movable device in the fifth embodiment are in operation. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an operating state in which all of the movable bodies relating to the above-board movable device and the below-board movable device in the fifth embodiment are operated. 13 is a diagram showing the movable body of the above-board movable device and some of the movable bodies of the below-board movable device in the operating state according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. This is a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table related to the fifth embodiment. A timing chart showing the presentation flow according to various fluctuation patterns in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a start-up action effect selection table according to the fifth embodiment. A figure showing the case where the second activation effect is performed as the start-up activation effect in the fifth embodiment. 13 is a reach line selection table according to the fifth embodiment. A figure explaining how the normal line display reach formation effect in the fifth embodiment is performed. A figure explaining how the special line display reach formation effect in the fifth embodiment is performed. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating how the line non-display reach formation effect according to the fifth embodiment is performed. A figure explaining how the first half of the development performance in the fifth embodiment is carried out. A figure explaining how the second half of the development performance in the fifth embodiment is carried out. A figure explaining how the first half of the development performance in a modified example of the fifth embodiment is carried out. A figure explaining how the second half of the development performance in a modified example of the fifth embodiment is carried out.

Embodiments of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. In each of the drawings referred to, identical parts will be given the same reference numerals, and duplicate explanations of identical parts will generally be omitted. For the sake of simplicity, this specification may use symbols or signs that refer to information, signals, physical quantities, components, etc., and omit or abbreviate the names of the information, signals, physical quantities, components, etc. associated with those symbols or signs. Furthermore, in any of the flowcharts described below, the execution order of multiple processes in any of the steps can be arbitrarily changed or executed in parallel, as long as no inconsistencies occur in the process content.

<Basic embodiment>
The gaming machine of the present invention will be described in the first embodiment and thereafter, but first, a basic embodiment that forms the basis of the first embodiment and thereafter will be described. In the basic embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be specifically described.

1. Structure of the Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. First, the structure of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described using Figures 1 to 5. In the following description, the left, right, up, and down directions of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 refer to the left, right, up, and down directions (as viewed from the front) of a player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Furthermore, "forward" refers to the direction from the pachinko gaming machine PY1 approaching the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1, and "rearward" refers to the direction from the player facing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 approaching the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a gaming machine frame 2. The gaming machine frame 2 has a gaming board mounting frame 2A to which a gaming board unit YU (described later) is attached, and a front frame 23m that is rotatably supported on the gaming board mounting frame 2A via a hinge 2B. The front frame 23m can be opened and closed relative to the gaming board mounting frame 2A. A transparent plate 23t is attached to the front frame 23m. When the front frame 23m is closed, the gaming board 1 attached to the gaming board mounting frame 2A faces the transparent plate 23t. Therefore, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is installed in a gaming parlor, a player standing in front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can see the playing area 6 formed on the gaming board 1 through the transparent plate 23t. The transparent plate 23t can be a transparent glass plate, a transparent synthetic resin plate, or the like. The transparent plate 23t only needs to allow the playing area 6 to be visible from the front of the pachinko gaming machine PY1.

A handle 72k that can be rotated to launch game balls is provided at the lower right of the front of the front frame 23m. The amount by which the handle 72k is rotated (rotation angle) corresponds to the magnitude (launch strength) of the force applied to the game ball to launch it (the amount by which the launch device 72, described below, drives the launch solenoid). Therefore, game balls are launched with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation of the handle 72k. In addition, a lower decorative body 36 that protrudes significantly forward is provided at the lower center of the front of the front frame 23m. An upper tray 34 is formed on the top surface of the lower decorative body 36 for storing game balls supplied to the handle 72k. In addition, a lower tray 35 is provided at the lower center of the front of the lower decorative body 36 for storing surplus game balls that cannot be accommodated in the upper tray 34.

A first input device (hereinafter referred to as the "normal button") 40 that can be pressed downward is provided forward of the upper tray 34 on the top surface of the lower decorative body 36. In addition, a second input device (hereinafter referred to as the "special button") 41 that can be pressed downward is provided on the right decorative body 32, which is formed to protrude forward from the right edge of the surface of the front frame 23m.

A speaker 52 capable of outputting sound is provided on the bottom surface of the upper decorative body 31, which protrudes forward from the top of the surface of the front frame 23m. The speaker 52 consists of a left speaker 52L located on the left side and a right speaker 52R located on the right side. Illuminating frame lamps 53 are also provided on the right edge of the front frame 23m and on the left and right sides of the lower tray 35 at the front of the lower decorative body 36. Furthermore, movable frame movable devices 58 are attached to the upper left and right edges of the front frame 23m as presentation devices intended to heighten the enjoyment of the game. The frame movable devices 58 consist of a left frame movable device 58L located on the left side and a right frame movable device 58R located on the right side.

The position and number of components and devices installed on the gaming machine frame 2 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Next, the game board unit YU will be described mainly using Figures 2 to 5. The game board unit YU has a game board 1 and a presentation unit 1U attached to the back side of the game board 1. First, the game board 1 will be described. The game board 1 is made of a transparent synthetic resin plate. An opening 1A that is roughly circular when viewed from the front is formed in approximately the center of the game board 1. A roughly ring-shaped inner wall portion 1B protrudes forward along the opening 1A to define a play area 6 into which game balls can flow. In addition, a roughly ring-shaped outer wall portion 1C protrudes forward from the outside of the inner wall portion 1B to define the play area 6.

A play area 6 surrounded by an inner wall 1B, an outer wall 1C, etc. is formed on the front of the game board 1. In other words, the front of the game board 1 is divided into the play area 6 and the rest of the area by the inner wall 1B and the outer wall 1C.

The play area 6 is an area where game balls launched by operating the handle 72k can flow down, and is provided for playing on the pachinko game machine PY1. Numerous game nails (not shown) protrude from the play area 6. The game nails form paths that appropriately guide game balls that enter the play area 6 and flow down the play area 6 to the first start opening 11, second start opening 12, general prize opening 10, gate 13, first large prize opening 14, and second large prize opening 15, which will be described later. Note that start openings such as the first start opening 11 and second start opening 12 are referred to as ball entry openings, large prize openings such as the first large prize opening 14 and second large prize opening 15 are referred to as special prize openings or specific prize openings, and gate 13 can be referred to as a passage opening or passage area.

A center frame (center ornament) 61 is provided near the center of the game area 6, decorating the periphery of the opening 1A. The center frame 61 is provided with a stage that can guide game balls to the first starting hole 11 (described below), and a warp that can guide game balls to the stage.

The game area 6 is also provided with a first start winning device 11D, which has a first start opening 11 through which a game ball can enter, and a second start winning device (a so-called "electric chute") 12D, which allows or prevents the ball from entering the second start opening 12.

The first start entry device 11D is stationary. Therefore, the ease with which a gaming ball can enter the first start opening 11 remains constant (unchanging). The entry of a gaming ball into the first start opening 11 triggers a lottery for a first special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Symbol 1") (obtaining and determining a Special Symbol 1-related random number, described below; hereinafter also referred to as "Special Symbol 1 lottery") and the variable display of Special Symbol 1. Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the first start opening 11, a predetermined number of gaming balls (four in this embodiment) are paid out as prize balls.

The electric chute 12D is equipped with an operable electric chute opening/closing member 12k. The electric chute opening/closing member 12k is normally (in its normal state) in a closed position that prevents game balls from entering the second starting hole 12. When a special state is entered, it moves to an open position that allows game balls to enter the second starting hole 12. In this way, the movement of the electric chute opening/closing member 12k to the open position is also referred to as the "open state" of the second starting hole 12 or the electric chute 12D, and game balls can enter the second starting hole 12 only when it is in the open state. On the other hand, the electric chute opening/closing member 12k in its closed position is also referred to as the "closed state" of the second starting hole 12 or the electric chute 12D. In addition, when the second starting hole 12 or the electric chute 12D is in the "open state," it is also referred to as "the electric chute 12D being open," and when the electric chute 12D is in the "closed state," it is also referred to as "the electric chute 12D being closed."

The entry of a gaming ball into the second starting hole 12 triggers a lottery for a second special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "Special Symbol 2") (obtaining and determining a Special Symbol 2-related random number, described below; hereinafter also referred to as "Special Symbol 2 lottery") and the variable display of Special Symbol 2. Furthermore, when a gaming ball enters the second starting hole 12, a predetermined number of gaming balls (four in this embodiment) are paid out as prize balls. The gaming area 6 is provided with a guidance stage 12g that guides gaming balls to the second starting hole 12.

The gaming area 6 also has a general winning opening (normal winning opening) 10 through which gaming balls can enter. When a gaming ball enters the general winning opening 10, a predetermined number of gaming balls (three in this embodiment) are paid out as prize balls.

The game area 6 is also provided with a gate 13 through which the game ball can pass. The passage of the game ball through the gate 13 triggers the drawing of a regular symbol (hereinafter referred to as "regular symbol") (i.e., the acquisition and determination of a regular symbol random number; hereinafter referred to as "regular symbol drawing") and the variable display of the regular symbol. The electric chute 12D is opened when the auxiliary game is played. In other words, the auxiliary game is a game that involves the opening of the electric chute 12D.

The game area 6 is also provided with a first large prize device 14D (hereinafter also referred to as "normal AT 14D") having a first large prize opening 14 through which game balls can enter. The first large prize device 14D is equipped with a normal AT opening/closing member 14k that can be operated between an open state and a closed state. The first large prize opening 14 is opened and closed by operation of the normal AT opening/closing member 14k. The normal AT opening/closing member 14k is normally in a closed state that blocks the first large prize opening 14, making it impossible for game balls to enter the first large prize opening 14. When the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is operated to the open state, game balls can enter the first large prize opening 14. In this way, game balls can enter the first large prize opening 14 only when the normal AT opening/closing member 14k is in the open state. When a gaming ball enters the first large prize opening 14, a predetermined number of gaming balls (15 in this embodiment) are paid out as prize balls.

The game area 6 is also provided with a second large prize device 15D (hereinafter also referred to as "VAT 15D") having a second large prize opening 15 through which a game ball can enter. The second large prize device 15D is equipped with an operable VAT opening/closing member 15k. The VAT opening/closing member 15k normally blocks the second large prize opening 15. The VAT opening/closing member 15k can be in an open state. Game balls can enter the second large prize opening 15 only when the VAT opening/closing member 15k is in the open state. On the other hand, the state in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k blocks the second large prize opening 15 is also referred to as the "closed state." In this way, the second large prize opening 15 is opened and closed by the operation of the VAT opening/closing member 15k. When a game ball enters the second large prize opening 15, a predetermined number of game balls (15 in this embodiment) are paid out as prize balls.

Now, using Figure 3, we will explain the second large prize device 15D in detail. Inside the second large prize device 15D, there is a gate-shaped second large prize opening sensor 15a that detects a gaming ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 and can allow the gaming ball to pass downward.

In the area downstream of the second large prize opening sensor 15a, there is a specific area 16 and a non-specific area 17 through which game balls can pass (enter). Game balls that pass through the second large prize opening sensor 15a are sorted by a sorting device 16D into either the specific area 16 or the non-specific area 17. The sorting device 16D is equipped with a sorting member 16k consisting of a substantially rectangular flat plate, and a sorting solenoid 16s that drives the sorting member 16k. The sorting member 16k is configured to be slidable left and right by the drive of the sorting solenoid 16s.

When the distribution solenoid 16s is not energized, the distribution member 16k is in a first state (passage prevention state: when viewed from the front in Figure 3 (A) , the left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the right of the left end of the specific area 16, and the distribution member 16k covers the specific area 16 directly above) in which it prevents game balls from passing through to the specific area 16. When the distribution member 16k is in the first state, a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 cannot pass through the specific area 16 after passing through the second large prize opening sensor 15a, and instead passes through the non-specific area 17. The route of the game ball flowing from the second large prize opening 15 to the non-specific area 17 is called the first route.

On the other hand, when the distribution solenoid 16s is energized, the distribution member 16k is in a second state that allows game balls to pass through (enter) the specific area 16 (passage-permitting state: when viewed from the front in Figure 3 (B), the left end of the distribution member 16k is located slightly to the left of the right end of the specific area 16, the distribution member 16k does not cover the specific area 16 directly above, and the area directly above the specific area 16 is open). When the distribution member 16k is in the second state, a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 can easily pass through the specific area 16 after passing the second large prize opening sensor 15a. The route of the game ball flowing down from the second large prize opening 15 to the specific area 16 is called the second route.

The distributing member 16k is basically held in the first state. In other words, the first state can be said to be the normal state of the distributing member 16k. Then, only during a specified round of play (e.g., 16R), the distributing solenoid 16s is energized and the distributing member 16k can change to the second state. The operating mode of the distributing member 16k can be changed as appropriate.

Specific area sensor 16a and non-specific area sensor 17a are provided in specific area 16 and non-specific area 17, respectively, to detect game balls that pass through (enter) each area 16, 17 and allow the game balls to pass downward.

It is possible to provide only one of the first special prize device 14D and the second special prize device 15D, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay. Depending on the gameplay characteristics, it is also possible to provide two special prize devices, such as the first special prize device 14D, that do not have a specific area or allocation device.

As shown in Figure 2, two outlets 19 are provided at the bottom of the game area 6 to discharge game balls that have been shot into the game area 6 but have not entered any of the winning slots. The game board 1 is also provided with an illuminating board lamp 54.

The play area 6 through which game balls can flow can be divided into a left play area 6A (first play area) on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction, and a right play area 6B (second play area) on the right side. The operation of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that it flows down the left play area 6A is called a "left hit." On the other hand, the operation of the handle 72k that launches the game ball so that it flows down the right play area 6B is called a "right hit." In the pachinko game machine PY1, the flow path through which game balls can flow when launched by a left hit is called the first flow path R1, and the flow path through which game balls can flow when launched by a right hit is called the second flow path R2. The first flow path R1 and the second flow path R2 are also composed of a number of game nails, etc.

A first start opening 11 and two general winning openings 10 are provided on the first flow path R1. Therefore, by using a left-handed shot to launch a game ball down the first flow path R1, a player can aim for a win in the first start opening 11 or the general winning opening 10. On the other hand, a second start opening 12, a general winning opening 10, a gate 13, a first large winning opening 14, and a second large winning opening 15 are provided on the second flow path R2. Therefore, by using a right-handed shot to launch a game ball down the second flow path R2, a player can aim for a win in the second start opening 12, the general winning opening 10, the first large winning opening 14, or the second large winning opening 15.

In addition, game balls that do not enter any of the winning slots (first start slot 11, second start slot 12, general winning slot 10, first large winning slot 14, and second large winning slot 15) are guided to and discharged from the outlet 19. In addition, the number of winning balls awarded for each winning slot can be set appropriately.

In addition, displays 8 are located below and to the left of the play area 6 formed on the front of the game board 1 (in the area other than the play area 6). As shown in Figure 4, displays 8 include a special chart 1 display 81a that variably displays special chart 1, a special chart 2 display 81b that variably displays special chart 2, and a regular chart display 82 that variably displays regular charts. In addition, displays 8 include a special chart 1 reserved indicator 83a that displays the number of special chart 1 reserved (U1: the number of reserved variable displays of special chart 1 by the special chart 1 display 81a), and a special chart 2 reserved indicator 83b that displays the number of special chart 2 reserved (U2: the number of reserved variable displays of special chart 2 by the special chart 2 display 81b), which will be described later.

The variable display of special chart 1 is executed when a special chart 1 lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the first starting gate 11. Furthermore, the variable display of special chart 2 is executed when a special chart 2 lottery is held in response to a gaming ball entering the second starting gate 12. In the following explanation, special charts 1 and 2 are collectively referred to as special charts or special patterns, and the special chart 1 lottery and special chart 2 lottery are collectively referred to as special chart lotteries. Furthermore, the special chart 1 display 81a and the special chart 2 display 81b are collectively referred to as the special chart display 81. Furthermore, the special chart 1 reserve display 83a and the special chart 2 reserve display 83b are collectively referred to as the special chart reserve display 83.

The variable display of the special symbol notifies the results of the special symbol lottery. In the variable display of the special symbol, the special symbol is displayed variably and then statically. The statically displayed special symbol (static special symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a result of the variable display) is one special symbol selected from multiple types of special symbols by the special symbol lottery. If the static special symbol is a predetermined specific special symbol (a special symbol with a specific stopping pattern, i.e., a jackpot symbol), a jackpot game (an example of a special game) is played in which the jackpot slots (first jackpot slot 14 and second jackpot slot 15) are opened. The game state in which a jackpot game is being played is called a jackpot game state. A jackpot game state is an example of an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

The special symbol display 81 is composed of, for example, eight LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) arranged horizontally, and displays a special symbol according to the result of the special symbol lottery depending on how they light up. For example, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), the special symbol display 81 displays a jackpot symbol consisting of the first, second, fifth, and sixth LEDs from the left lit, such as "□□■■□□■■" (□: lit, ■: unlit). Furthermore, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the special symbol display 81 displays a loss symbol consisting of only the rightmost LED lit, such as "■■■■■■■□." The lighting pattern of the LEDs corresponding to the result of the special symbol lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate. Therefore, for example, all LEDs may be turned off to indicate a loss symbol.

In addition, when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, it is displayed for a predetermined variable time before it is displayed in a static manner. The variable display of the special symbol is, for example, a manner in which each LED lights up so that light flows repeatedly from left to right. The variable display of the special symbol is not particularly limited, and may be set as appropriate, such as all LEDs flashing simultaneously, unless each LED is displayed in a static manner (illuminated in a specific manner).

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 11 or the second starting port 12, various random numbers (an example of judgment information) may be obtained for use in conducting special drawing lotteries, etc. These various random numbers are temporarily stored as special drawing reserves in the special drawing reserve memory unit 105, described below. Hereinafter, the various random numbers obtained when a gaming ball enters the first starting port 11 are referred to as "special drawing 1-related random numbers," and the various random numbers obtained when a gaming ball enters the second starting port 12 are referred to as "special drawing 2-related random numbers." Herein, the special drawing 1-related random numbers are stored as special drawing 1 reserves in the special drawing reserve memory unit 105a within the special drawing reserve memory unit 105. Meanwhile, the special drawing 2-related random numbers are stored as special drawing 2 reserves in the special drawing reserve memory unit 105b within the special drawing reserve memory unit 105. An upper limit (four in this embodiment) is set for the number of special chart 1 reserves (special chart 1 reserve number) that can be stored in the special chart 1 reserve memory unit 105a and the number of special chart 2 reserves (special chart 2 reserve number) that can be stored in the special chart 2 reserve memory unit 105b. The upper limit for the number of special chart 1 reserves and the number of special chart 2 reserves can be changed as appropriate, and the upper limit may be set to "none." Note that, below, special chart 1 reserves and special chart 2 reserves are collectively referred to as "special chart reserves," and the number of special chart 1 reserves and the number of special chart 2 reserves are collectively referred to as "special chart reserve number." Furthermore, special chart 1-related random numbers and special chart 2-related random numbers are collectively referred to as "special chart-related random numbers."

In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, if the variable display of the special symbol is not performed immediately after the gaming ball enters the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12, specifically if a prize is won while the variable display of the special symbol is being performed or during a jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol (or the right to draw a special symbol) for that prize can be reserved. The reserved special symbol stored in the special symbol reserve memory unit 105 is consumed when the variable display of the special symbol based on that reserved special symbol becomes possible. In other words, consuming the reserved special symbol means determining the special symbol-related random number, etc. corresponding to that reserved special symbol and executing the variable display of the special symbol to show the result of that determination.

The number of reserved special drawings is then displayed on the reserved special drawing display 83. The reserved special drawing 1 display 83a and the reserved special drawing 2 display 83b each consist of, for example, four LEDs, and the number of reserved special drawings can be displayed by lighting up the LEDs equal to the number of reserved special drawings.

The variable display of the normal map also notifies the result of the normal map lottery. In the variable display of the normal map, the normal map is displayed variably and then stopped. The stopped normal map (stop normal map, normal map derived and displayed as a result of the variable display) is one normal map selected from multiple types of normal maps by the normal map lottery. If the stopped normal map is a specific, predetermined normal map (a normal map with a predetermined stopping pattern, i.e., a winning pattern), an auxiliary game is played in which the second starting hole 12 (electric chute 12D) is opened.

The regular map display 82 is made up of, for example, two LEDs, and displays a regular map according to the result of the regular map lottery depending on how they light up. If the result of the regular map lottery is a win, the regular map display 82 displays a winning pattern consisting of both LEDs lit, such as "□□" (□: lit, ■: unlit). If the result of the regular map lottery is a loss, the regular map display 82 displays a losing pattern consisting of only the right LED lit, such as "■□". A losing pattern may also be one in which all LEDs are unlit. The lighting pattern of the LEDs corresponding to the result of the regular map lottery is not limited and can be set as appropriate.

In addition, before the normal map is displayed as stopped, the normal map is displayed as a variable display for a predetermined variable time. The variable display of the normal map is, for example, a mode in which both LEDs light up alternately. Note that the variable display of the normal map is not particularly limited, and may be set appropriately, such as all LEDs flashing simultaneously, unless each LED is displayed as stopped (lighted up in a specific mode).

In pachinko gaming machine PY1, when a gaming ball passes through gate 13, a normal symbol random number (an example of judgment information) for conducting a normal symbol lottery may be obtained. This random number is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106, described below, provided that the variable normal symbol display or auxiliary game is not being executed. An upper limit (four in this embodiment) is set for the number of normal symbol reserves (normal symbol reserve number) that can be stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106. The upper limit for the number of normal symbol reserves can be changed as appropriate, and may be set to "none." Note that, below, the normal symbol random number obtained when a gaming ball passes through gate 13 is also referred to as a "normal symbol-related random number." Furthermore, in this embodiment, a normal symbol reserve indicator that displays the normal symbol reserve number is not provided, but a normal symbol reserve indicator may be added to the indicators 8. For example, a normal symbol reserve indicator with a configuration similar to that of special symbol reserve indicator 83 can be used as the normal symbol reserve indicator.

Next, using Figure 5, we will explain the presentation unit 1U attached to the back of the game board 1. The presentation unit 1U is a unit made up of multiple devices that mainly perform presentations. The presentation unit 1U is equipped with an image display device 50, a first board movable device (hereinafter referred to as the "above-board movable device") 55, and a second board movable device (hereinafter referred to as the "below-board movable device") 56.

The image display device 50 is equipped with a display unit 50a that is composed of, for example, a 20-inch 3D liquid crystal display and is capable of displaying 3D images. Note that the image display device 50 may also be another display device, such as one composed of multiple liquid crystal displays or one composed of an EL (Electro Luminescence) display, as long as it is capable of displaying images.

The above-board movable device 55 is configured to be movable along the display unit 50a and includes a decorated above-board movable body 55k. The below-board movable device 56 is configured to be movable along the display unit 50a and includes a decorated below-board movable body 56k.

Figure 5(A) shows a schematic representation of the above-board movable body 55k and the below-board movable body 56k held in a normal standby state (initial position) when not in operation. When the drive source of the above-board movable device 55 is driven, the above-board movable body 55k moves downward (descends), and when the drive source of the below-board movable device 56 is driven, the below-board movable body 56k moves upward (rises). At this time, the image display device 50 is covered by the lowered above-board movable body 55k or the raised below-board movable body 56k, making the image display device 50 difficult to see.

The position and number of components and devices installed on the game board unit YU can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

2. Electrical Configuration of the Gaming Machine Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to Figures 6-7. As shown in Figures 6-7, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 includes a game control board (hereinafter referred to as the "main control board") 100 that controls game profits (game progress) such as special symbol lottery, variable special symbol display, jackpot game, game state setting (described later), normal symbol lottery, variable normal symbol display, and supplemental game. A presentation control board (hereinafter referred to as the "sub-control board") 120 controls game presentations (such as special symbol variable presentations, hold presentations, operation presentations, jackpot game presentations, etc.) and customer waiting presentations according to the progress of the game via the main control board 100. A payout control board 170 controls the payout of game balls, etc., and is located behind the image display device 50 on the gaming board 1. The main control board 100 can be considered the game control unit (main control unit) that controls the game. The sub-control board 120 can be positioned as a performance control unit (sub-control unit) that controls the performance together with the image control board 140, lamp control circuit 151, and audio control circuit 161, which will be described later. The performance control unit is only required to have at least the sub-control board 120 and be able to control various performances using performance means (image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, etc.).

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 also has a power supply board 190. The power supply board 190 supplies power to the main control board 100, the sub-control board 120, and the payout control board 170, and also supplies the necessary power to other devices via these boards. The power supply board 190 is provided with a backup power circuit 192. When power is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1, the backup power circuit 192 supplies power to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the presentation RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120, which will be described later. Therefore, the information stored in the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 and the presentation RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is retained even when power is lost to the pachinko gaming machine PY1. A power switch 191 is also connected to the power supply board 190. The power is turned on/off by turning the power switch 191 on/off. In addition, a backup power supply circuit for the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 may be provided on the main control board 100, and a backup power supply circuit for the performance RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 may be provided on the sub-control board 120.

As shown in Figure 6, the main control board 100 is equipped with a game control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as the "game control microcomputer") 101, which controls the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 101 includes a game ROM (Read Only Memory) 103 that stores programs and tables for controlling the progress of the game, a game RAM (Random Access Memory) 104 used as work memory, and a game CPU (Central Processing Unit) 102 that executes the programs stored in the game ROM 103.

The gaming ROM 103 stores programs for performing the main control processing and main timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The gaming ROM 103 also stores a jackpot determination table, a jackpot symbol type determination table, a reach determination table, a special symbol variation pattern determination table, a look-ahead determination table, a jackpot game control table, a win determination table, a regular symbol variation pattern determination table, and an auxiliary game control table, which will be described later. The gaming ROM 103 may be external. The gaming RAM 104 also includes the special symbol reserve memory unit 105 and regular symbol reserve memory unit 106, which have been described above.

The main control board 100 also includes a gaming I/O (Input/Output) port 118 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and a RAM clear switch 119 for causing the gaming CPU 102 to clear information stored in the gaming RAM 104.

In addition, various sensors and actuators are connected to the main control board 100 via a specified relay board (not shown). Therefore, signals output by the various sensors are input to the main control board 100. The main control board 100 also outputs signals to the various actuators.

The various sensors connected to the main control board 100 include a first start opening sensor 11a, a second start opening sensor 12a, a general prize opening sensor 10a, a gate sensor 13a, a first large prize opening sensor 14a, a second large prize opening sensor 15a, a specific area sensor 16a, and a non-specific area sensor 17a.

The first start opening sensor 11a detects game balls that have entered the first start opening 11. The second start opening sensor 12a detects game balls that have entered the second start opening 12. The general winning opening sensor 10a detects game balls that have entered the general winning opening 10. A general winning opening sensor 10a is provided for each general winning opening 10. The gate sensor 13a is provided at the gate 13 and detects game balls that have passed through the gate 13. The first large winning opening sensor 14a detects game balls that have entered the first large winning opening 14. The second large winning opening sensor 15a detects game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 15. The specific area sensor 16a detects game balls that have passed through the specific area 16 (entered the specific area 16). The non-specific area sensor 17a detects gaming balls that pass through (enter) the non-specific area 17. When each sensor detects a gaming ball, it outputs a signal to the main control board 100 according to the detection result.

The type and number of sensors connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Furthermore, the various actuators connected to the main control board 100 include an electric chute solenoid 12s, a first large prize opening solenoid 14s, a second large prize opening solenoid 15s, and a distribution solenoid 16s. The electric chute solenoid 12s drives the electric chute opening/closing member 12k of the electric chute 12D. The first large prize opening solenoid 14s drives the normal AT opening/closing member 14k of the first large prize device 14D. The second large prize opening solenoid 15s drives the VAT opening/closing member 15k of the second large prize device 15D. The distribution solenoid 16s drives the distribution member 16k of the distribution device 16D.

The type and number of actuators connected to the main control board 100 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

Furthermore, displays 8 (special chart display 81, regular chart display 82, and special chart reserved display 83) are connected to the main control board 100. The display of these displays 8 is controlled by the game control microcomputer 101.

The main control board 100 also sends various commands to the payout control board 170 and receives signals from the payout control board 170 to monitor payouts. The payout control board 170 is connected to a card unit CU (installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 and enabling ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card) and a prize ball payout device 73, as well as to a launching device 72 via a launch control circuit 175. The launching device 72 includes a handle 72k (see Figure 1).

The payout control board 170 drives the prize ball motor 73m of the prize ball payout device 73 to pay out prize balls or loan balls based on signals from the game control microcomputer 101 and signals from the connected card unit CU. The paid-out game balls are detected by a prize ball sensor 73a, which counts the game balls, and a detection signal from the prize ball sensor 73a is output to the payout control board 170.

The launching device 72 is also equipped with a touch switch 72a that can detect contact with the handle 72k (see Figure 1) by a player or other person. When the player operates the handle 72k, the touch switch 72a detects the player's contact with the handle 72k and outputs a detection signal to the payout control board 170. A launch volume knob 72b that can detect the rotation angle (amount of operation) of the handle 72k is also connected to the launching device 72. The launching device 72 drives the launch solenoid 72s so that gaming balls are launched with a strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the handle 72k detected by the launch volume knob 72b. In the pachinko gaming machine PY1, when rotation of the handle 72k is maintained, one gaming ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds.

In addition, the main control board 100 sends various commands containing information about the game to the sub-control board 120 as the game progresses. The sub-control board 120 can grasp the progress of the game (the content of game control) by the main control board 100 based on the various commands sent from the main control board 100. The connection between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120 is a unidirectional communication connection that only allows signals to be sent from the main control board 100 to the sub-control board 120. In other words, a unidirectional circuit (e.g., a circuit using a diode) (not shown) is interposed between the main control board 100 and the sub-control board 120 as a means for restricting communication direction.

As shown in Figure 7, the sub-control board 120 is equipped with a presentation control one-chip microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as the "presentation control microcomputer") 121, which controls the presentation of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to a program. The presentation control microcomputer 121 includes a presentation ROM 123 that stores programs for controlling presentations as the game progresses using the main control board 100, a presentation RAM 124 and a presentation FeRAM 125 that are used as work memory, and a presentation CPU 122 that executes the programs stored in the presentation ROM 123. The presentation FeRAM 125 is a ferroelectric memory that can retain stored information even when power is not supplied.

The performance ROM 123 also stores programs for performing the sub-control main processing, reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, and 10 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The performance ROM 123 may also be external.

The sub-control board 120 also includes a presentation I/O port 138 for inputting and outputting data and signals, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 139. The RTC 139 measures the current date and time. The RTC 139 operates on power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PY1 from a designated island power supply device (not shown). When power is not supplied from the island power supply device, the RTC 139 operates on power supplied from a backup power circuit 192 provided on the power supply board 190. This allows the RTC 139 to measure the current date and time even when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is not powered on. A backup power circuit for the RTC 139 may be provided on the sub-control board 120. The backup power circuit may include a capacitor and an internal battery (such as a button battery).

An image control board 140 is connected to the sub-control board 120. The presentation control microcomputer 121 of the sub-control board 120 causes the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 to control the display of the image display device 50 based on commands received from the main control board 100, i.e., in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100. The connection between the sub-control board 120 and the image control board 140 is a two-way communication connection that allows signals to be sent both from the sub-control board 120 to the image control board 140 and from the image control board 140 to the sub-control board 120.

The image control board 140 includes an image ROM 142 that stores programs for image control, an image RAM 143 used as work memory, and an image CPU 141 that executes the programs stored in the image ROM 142. The image control board 140 also includes a CGROM 145 that stores image data to be displayed on the image display device 50, a VRAM 146 that is used to expand the image data stored in the CGROM 145, and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 144. Naturally, all or part of these electronic components may be configured on a single chip. The CGROM 145 stores, for example, image data (still image data and video data, specifically image data for characters, items, figures, letters, numbers, symbols, etc. (including effect designs), background images, etc.) for displaying images on the image display device 50.

The VDP 144 reads image data from the CGROM 145 and displays it in a display area in the VRAM 146 in accordance with a display list created by the image CPU 141 based on instructions from the performance control microcomputer 121. The VDP 144 then appropriately combines the displayed image data and draws an image in the frame buffer in the VRAM 146. The image drawn in the frame buffer is then output to the image display device 50 as an RGB signal. As a result, various performance images are displayed on the display unit 50a.

The display list consists of a group of commands that instruct the execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. The display list contains information on various parameters, such as the type of image to be drawn, the position at which the image is drawn, the display priority, the display magnification, and the image transparency.

The performance control microcomputer 121 outputs voice, music, sound effects, etc. from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 based on commands received from the main control board 100, i.e., in accordance with the progress of the game by the main control board 100.

Audio data such as the sound output from the speaker 52 is stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120. The audio control circuit 161 may be a board with a CPU mounted on it. In this case, the CPU may be made to perform audio control. In this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board and audio data may be stored in the ROM. The speaker 52 may also be connected to the image control board 140, and the image CPU 141 of the image control board 140 may be made to perform audio control. In this case, audio data may be stored in the image ROM 142 of the image control board 140.

The sub-control board 120 is also connected to various switches that serve as input units, various actuators that serve as drive sources, and various lamps via a specified relay board (not shown). Signals output by the various switches are input to the sub-control board 120. The sub-control board 120 also outputs signals to the various actuators. The sub-control board 120 also controls the lighting of various lamps via a lamp control circuit 151 based on commands received from the main control board 100.

The various switches connected to the sub-control board 120 include a normal button detection switch 40a and a special button detection switch 41a. The normal button detection switch 40a detects when the normal button 40 is pressed. The special button detection switch 41a detects when the special button 41 is pressed. Each detection switch 40a, 41a outputs a signal to the sub-control board 120 according to the detection content. The type and number of switches connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

The various actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 include an upper board drive motor 55m that drives the upper board movable device 55, an under-board drive motor 56m that drives the under-board movable device 56, and a frame drive motor 58m that drives the frame movable device 58. The presentation control microcomputer 121 drives these motors to cause each movable device to perform a specified operation. In more detail, the presentation control microcomputer 121 creates operation pattern data that determines the operating mode of each movable device, and controls the operation of each movable device via the lamp control circuit 151. The type and number of actuators connected to the sub-control board 120 can be changed as appropriate, as long as it does not interfere with gameplay.

The various lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 include a frame lamp 53, a board lamp 54, etc. The performance control microcomputer 121 is capable of lighting up each lamp. In more detail, the performance control microcomputer 121 creates light-emitting pattern data (data that determines the on/off status, light color, etc., also known as lamp data) that determines the light-emitting mode of each lamp, and controls the light emission of each lamp in accordance with the light-emitting pattern data. Note that data stored in the performance ROM 123 of the sub-control board 120 is used to create the light-emitting pattern data.

A CPU may be mounted on the lamp control circuit 151 board. In this case, the CPU may be configured to control the lighting of each lamp and the operation of each movable device. In this case, a ROM may be mounted on the board, and data related to lighting patterns and operation patterns may be stored in the ROM. The type and number of lamps connected to the sub-control board 120 may also be changed as appropriate, provided that this does not interfere with gameplay.

3. Main Games Played by the Gaming Machine Next, the main games played by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described using Figures 8 to 15. Note that the tables shown in Figures 8 to 15 are general ones for the purpose of this explanation, and if a different table is shown in the description of "Characteristics of the Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1" below, it will be assumed that that table is used in the pachinko gaming machine PY1. However, for configurations that do not show a different table in the description of "Characteristics of the Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1" below, it will be assumed that the table shown in this section is used, and also for configurations that show a different table in the description of "Characteristics of the Pachinko Gaming Machine PY1" below, it will be assumed that the table shown in this section can be used.

3-1. Games Related to Regular Symbols First, we will explain games related to regular symbols. When a launched game ball passes through the gate 13, the pachinko game machine PY1 performs a regular symbol lottery. After the regular symbol lottery is performed, the regular symbol display 82 displays a variable regular symbol (a variable display followed by a static display). The statically displayed regular symbols include winning symbols and losing symbols. Note that losing symbols on regular symbols are also referred to as "losing regular symbols" to distinguish them from the losing symbols on special symbols, which will be described later. When a winning symbol is statically displayed, an auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage through the gate 13 ends. On the other hand, when a losing regular symbol is statically displayed, no auxiliary game is executed, and the game related to the passage through the gate 13 ends. In the following, the passing of the game ball through the gate 13 is referred to as the "establishment of the regular symbol start condition."

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs this series of games (regular symbol lottery, variable regular symbol display, auxiliary games), it acquires regular symbol-related random numbers when the regular symbol start conditions are met. The acquired regular symbol-related random numbers include regular symbol random numbers, as shown in Figure 8 (A). Regular symbol random numbers are random numbers used to determine whether a win has occurred. Random numbers are also called determination information. Appropriate ranges are set for the random numbers.

3-1-1. Win Determination Win determination is a determination to determine whether a win has occurred (whether to execute an auxiliary game) according to a win determination table such as that shown in FIG. 9(A). The win determination table is associated with the game state, which will be described later. That is, the win determination table includes a win determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving win determination table) and a win determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving win determination table). In each win determination table, a determination value (normal symbol random number value) of the normal symbol random number is assigned to the win or miss result of the win determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether a win or miss has occurred by determining the acquired normal symbol random number according to the win determination table. Then, based on the result of the win determination, a normal symbol variation pattern is determined to display the variable normal symbol. If the result of the win determination is a win, a winning symbol is basically displayed as a static symbol in the variable normal symbol display. On the other hand, if the result of the win determination is a miss, a missing normal symbol is basically displayed as a static symbol in the variable normal symbol display. The probability of winning can be changed as appropriate. Also, the win determination table does not need to be divided for each gaming state.

3-1-2. Map Change Map change pattern determination is a determination to determine the map change pattern according to the map change pattern determination table as shown in Figure 9 (B). The map change pattern is identification information regarding predetermined items related to the variable display of the map, such as the map change time.

The normal map fluctuation pattern determination table is associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). In other words, there are normal map fluctuation pattern determination tables: a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table) and a normal map fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving normal map fluctuation pattern determination table). Note that it is not necessary to separate the normal map fluctuation pattern determination tables for each game state.

Each normal map fluctuation pattern determination table stores one normal map fluctuation pattern, which is the result of the normal map fluctuation pattern determination, for each stopped normal map. In other words, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can vary the normal map fluctuation time between the non-time-saving state and the time-saving state. For example, in the non-time-saving state, when a losing normal map (a losing normal map) is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 30 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map, and when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 30 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map. Also, in the time-saving state, when a losing normal map is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 5 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map, and when a winning pattern is stopped and displayed, a normal map fluctuation pattern with a normal map fluctuation time of, for example, 5 seconds is determined for the variable display of the normal map. The variable display of the normal map with the normal map fluctuation time corresponding to the normal map fluctuation pattern determined by this determination is performed by the normal map display device 82. Furthermore, these map fluctuation times can be changed as appropriate. In this way, hit detection and map fluctuation pattern detection are performed, and the map display 82 displays the map in a variable manner.

3-1-3. Auxiliary Game Auxiliary game is executed when a winning symbol is displayed (derived) as a display result (a result of a regular symbol lottery) in the variable display of the regular symbol.

The elements that make up the auxiliary game (auxiliary game components) include various factors such as the number of times the electric chute 12D opens and the opening time for each opening. Each of these elements is associated with a game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). The pachinko gaming machine PY1 controls the auxiliary game in accordance with an auxiliary game control table such as that shown in Figure 9 (C) based on the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). The auxiliary game control table is associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). Each auxiliary game control table stores auxiliary game components. The number of times the electric chute 12D opens and the opening time for each of these elements can be changed as appropriate.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a different opening time for the electric chute 12D during auxiliary play in the non-time-shortened state and during auxiliary play in the time-shortened state. For example, during auxiliary play in the non-time-shortened state, the electric chute 12D is opened for a first opening time (a time during which it is difficult to get the game ball to enter the electric chute 12D (e.g., 0.08 seconds)). Hereinafter, auxiliary play in the non-time-shortened state is also referred to as a "short-open auxiliary play." Furthermore, during auxiliary play in the time-shortened state, the electric chute 12D is opened for a second opening time that is longer than the first opening time (a time during which it is easy to get the game ball to enter the electric chute 12D (e.g., 3.0 seconds)). Hereinafter, auxiliary play in the time-shortened state is also referred to as a "long-open auxiliary play." Note that the opening time for the electric chute 12D may be the same during auxiliary play in the non-time-shortened state and auxiliary play in the time-shortened state.

3-2. Games Related to Special Symbols Next, we will explain games related to special symbols. When a launched game ball enters the first starting hole 11, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 conducts a special symbol 1 lottery. When the special symbol 1 lottery is conducted, the special symbol 1 display 81a displays a variable special symbol 1 (a variable display followed by a static display) to notify the result of the special symbol 1 lottery. Here, the statically displayed special symbol 1 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. In other words, the results of the special symbol 1 lottery include a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. When a jackpot symbol is displayed statically, a jackpot game is executed, a new game state is established, and the game based on the winning is terminated. On the other hand, when a losing symbol is displayed statically, the jackpot game is not conducted, and the game based on the winning is terminated.

Similarly, when a fired game ball enters the second starting hole 12, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 conducts a special drawing for the special symbol 2. When the special symbol 2 drawing is conducted, the special symbol 2 display 81b displays a variable special symbol 2 (a variable display followed by a static display) to notify the result of the special symbol 2 drawing. Here, the statically displayed special symbol 2 includes a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. In other words, the results of the special symbol 2 drawing include a jackpot symbol and a losing symbol. When a jackpot symbol is displayed as a static jackpot symbol, a jackpot game is executed, a new game state is established, and the game based on that winning is terminated. On the other hand, when a losing symbol is displayed as a static jackpot symbol, the jackpot game is not conducted and the game based on that winning is terminated.

In the following, the entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 11 is referred to as the "fulfillment of the first start condition," and the entry of a gaming ball into the second start hole 12 is referred to as the "fulfillment of the second start condition." Furthermore, the "fulfillment of the first start condition" and the "fulfillment of the second start condition" are collectively referred to as the "fulfillment of the start condition." Furthermore, the losing special symbols are also referred to as "losing special symbols" to distinguish them from the aforementioned losing regular symbols.

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs this series of games (special symbol lottery, variable display of special symbols, jackpot game, and game state setting), it acquires special symbol-related random numbers when the start conditions are met and makes various judgments about these random numbers. The acquired special symbol-related random numbers include special symbol random numbers (jackpot random numbers), jackpot symbol type random numbers, reach random numbers, and special symbol variation pattern random numbers, as shown in Figure 8 (B). Special symbol random numbers are random numbers used to make jackpot judgments. Jackpot symbol type random numbers are random numbers used to make jackpot symbol type judgments. Reach random numbers are random numbers used to make reach judgments. Special symbol variation pattern random numbers are random numbers used to make special symbol variation pattern judgments. Random numbers are also referred to as judgment information. An appropriate range is set for each random number.

3-2-1. Jackpot Determination Jackpot determination is a determination to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred (whether or not a jackpot game is executed) according to a jackpot determination table such as that shown in FIG. 10(A). The jackpot determination table is associated with the game state, specifically, whether it is a normal probability state or a high probability state. That is, the jackpot determination table includes a jackpot determination table used in the normal probability state (normal probability jackpot determination table) and a jackpot determination table used in the high probability state (high probability jackpot determination table).

In each jackpot determination table, a special symbol random number determination value (special symbol random number value) is assigned to the jackpot and miss results of the jackpot determination. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether the acquired special symbol random number is a jackpot or a miss by judging it according to the jackpot determination table. As shown in Figure 10 (A), the high-probability jackpot determination table has more special symbol random number determination values that result in a jackpot than the normal-probability jackpot determination table. In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot can be changed as appropriate.

3-2-2. Jackpot Symbol Type Determination Jackpot symbol type determination is a determination to determine the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) according to a jackpot symbol type determination table as shown in Fig. 10(B) when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot. Each type of jackpot symbol is associated with the content of the jackpot, in other words, the components of the jackpot that are made up of the gaming benefits granted to the player.

The jackpot symbol type determination table is associated with the type of special symbol (special symbol 1/special symbol 2) that is variably displayed; in other words, the type of start port (first start port 11/second start port 12) where the winning combination that caused the jackpot symbol type determination (the winning combination that triggered the jackpot symbol type determination) occurred. In other words, the jackpot symbol type determination table includes a jackpot symbol type determination table (first jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of special symbol 1, and a jackpot symbol type determination table (second jackpot symbol type determination table) used when performing the variable display of special symbol 2.

There are multiple types of jackpot symbols, and in each jackpot symbol type determination table, a determination value of the jackpot symbol type random number (jackpot symbol type random number value) is assigned to the jackpot symbol type, which is the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the type of jackpot symbol by judging the acquired jackpot symbol type random number according to the jackpot symbol type determination table. Then, in the first jackpot symbol type determination table and the second jackpot symbol type determination table, the jackpot symbol type random number value is assigned appropriately to various jackpot symbols. Note that the allocation rate for jackpot symbol types can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, the number of jackpot symbol types can be increased or decreased as appropriate.

For example, as shown in Figure 10 (B), the allocation rate for the jackpot symbol type determined for special chart 1 is 10% for jackpot symbol A, 40% for jackpot symbol B, and 50% for jackpot symbol C. Furthermore, the allocation rate for the jackpot symbol type determined for special chart 2 is 100% for jackpot symbol X. In this way, it is possible to have different allocation rates for the jackpot symbol type between the special chart 1 lottery, which is held when a gaming ball enters the first starting slot 11, and the special chart 2 lottery, which is held when a gaming ball enters the second starting slot 12.

3-2-3. Reach judgment Reach judgment is a judgment to determine whether or not to generate a reach in the special chart variation performance described later, according to the reach judgment table as shown in FIG. 10 (C) when the result of the jackpot judgment is a miss.

The reach determination table is associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). That is, there are reach determination tables: a reach determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving reach determination table) and a reach determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving reach determination table). Note that it is not necessary to separate reach determination tables for each game state.

In each reach determination table, reach random number determination values (reach random number values) are assigned to the reach determination results of "reach in progress (reach occurs)" and "reach not in progress (reach not occurs)." Therefore, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether a reach is in progress or not (whether a reach will occur) by judging the acquired reach random number according to the reach determination table. As shown in Figure 10 (C), the number of reach random number values determined as "reach in progress (reach will occur)" differs between the non-time-saving reach determination table and the time-saving reach determination table. Note that the probability of determining that a reach is in progress can be changed as appropriate. In the following, "reach in progress (reach will occur)," which is performed on the assumption that the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss," is referred to as "reach in progress, miss," and "no reach (reach not occurs)" is sometimes referred to as "no-reach, miss."

3-2-4. Special symbol variation pattern determination Special symbol variation pattern determination is a determination to determine the variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol (special symbol variation pattern) using a special symbol variation pattern determination table (special symbol variation pattern determination table) as shown in Figures 11 and 12, and is performed whether the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot or a miss. The special symbol variation pattern is identification information for identifying predetermined items such as the special symbol variation time and the presentation flow (presentation content) of the special symbol variation effect described below. Note that the special symbol variation pattern includes identification information regarding the results of the jackpot determination and the reach determination, as well as the special symbol variation time and the presentation flow (presentation content) of the special symbol variation effect. The identification information included in the special symbol variation pattern can be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, it is possible to use multiple types of special symbol variation patterns, each with different identification information, and the number of such patterns can be changed as appropriate.

The special symbol variation pattern determination table is associated with the type of special symbol (special symbol 1/special symbol 2) that performs the variable display that is the subject of the determination; in other words, the type of starting gate (first starting gate 11/second starting gate 12) where the winning that triggered the special symbol variation pattern determination occurred. In other words, the special symbol variation pattern determination table includes a special symbol variation pattern determination table (special symbol 1 variation pattern determination table: Figure 11) that is used when performing the variable display of special symbol 1, and a special symbol variation pattern determination table (special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table: Figure 12) that is used when performing the variable display of special symbol 2. Note that the special symbol variation pattern determination tables do not need to be separated according to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1/special symbol 2).

Each special chart fluctuation pattern determination table is also associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). That is, the special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table) and a special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table). Similarly, the special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table includes a special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table) and a special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table used in the time-saving state (time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table). Note that the special chart fluctuation pattern determination tables do not need to be separated by game state.

In addition, each special chart fluctuation pattern determination table associated with a game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state) is also associated with the jackpot determination result and the reach determination result. That is, the non-time-saving special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the non-time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table each have a jackpot, a reach-and-miss, and a reach-and-miss. Similarly, the time-saving special chart 1 fluctuation pattern determination table and the time-saving special chart 2 fluctuation pattern determination table each have a jackpot, a reach-and-miss, and a reach-and-miss. Note that the special chart fluctuation pattern determination tables do not have to be separated according to the jackpot determination result or the reach determination result.

Furthermore, each special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss is also associated with the number of reserved special charts. For example, there is a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 1 (U1) is 0 to 2, and a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 1 (U1) is 3 to 4. Furthermore, each special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss is also associated with the number of reserved special charts. Specifically, there is a special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 2 (U2) is 0 to 2, and a special chart 2 variation pattern determination table for a no-reach miss that is used when the number of reserved special charts 2 (U2) is 3 to 4. Note that it is not necessary to separate the special chart variation pattern determination tables according to the number of reserved special charts.

The special symbol display 81 then performs a variable display of the special symbol for the special symbol variation time according to the special symbol variation pattern determined by each special symbol variation pattern determination. When the jackpot symbol is displayed as a static display result (the result of the special symbol lottery) in the variable display of the special symbol, the next variable display of the special symbol is not immediately performed, and the jackpot game continues.

In addition, each special chart change pattern is associated with a special chart change effect presentation flow as shown in the second column from the right in the tables in Figures 11 and 12. Note that it is not necessary to associate a special chart change effect presentation flow with a special chart change pattern.

Also, as shown in the rightmost columns of the tables in Figures 11 and 12, special chart variation patterns are sometimes referred to by names that relate to the special chart (jackpot determination result) and the content of the special chart variation presentation. For example, a special chart variation pattern related to a jackpot is called a "jackpot variation." Among jackpot variations, a special chart variation pattern in which an SP reach, which is a type of reach, is performed is called an "SP jackpot variation," a special chart variation pattern in which an L reach is performed is called an "L jackpot variation," and a special chart variation pattern in which the special chart variation presentation ends with an N reach is called an "N jackpot variation." On the other hand, among misses with reach, a special chart variation pattern in which an SP reach, which is a type of reach, occurs is called an "SP miss variation," a special chart variation pattern in which an L reach, which is a type of reach, occurs among misses with reach is called an "L miss variation," a special chart variation pattern in which a special chart variation performance ends with an N reach, which is a type of reach, is called an "N miss variation," and a special chart variation pattern related to misses without reach is called a "normal miss variation." There are three types of normal miss variations with different variation times (normal A miss variation, normal B miss variation, normal C miss variation). Furthermore, when referring to SP jackpots and SP miss variations collectively, they are called SP variation or SP reach variation.

3-2-5. Prediction Judgment Based on the acquired special symbol-related random number, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 performs a prediction judgment in accordance with a prediction judgment table such as that shown in FIG. 13. The prediction judgment is performed before the jackpot judgment (specifically, when the ball enters the starting slot). Prediction judgments include, for example, determining whether a special symbol random number is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot judgment, determining which jackpot symbol type a jackpot symbol type a jackpot symbol type random number is determined to be, and determining which special symbol variation pattern a special symbol variation pattern random number is determined to be in the special symbol variation pattern judgment. The prediction judgment table is associated with the type of starting slot (first starting slot 11/second starting slot 12) associated with the start prize. That is, the prediction judgment table includes a prediction judgment table (first prediction judgment table) for when the ball enters the first starting slot 11 and a prediction judgment table (second prediction judgment table) for when the ball enters the second starting slot 12. Since the first starting port 11 is the starting port that triggers the drawing of the special drawing 1, the first look-ahead judgment table can also be called the special drawing 1 look-ahead judgment table. Also, since the second starting port 12 is the starting port that triggers the drawing of the special drawing 2, the second look-ahead judgment table can also be called the special drawing 2 look-ahead judgment table. Note that the look-ahead judgment table does not have to be divided according to the type of starting port (first starting port 11/second starting port 12).

The look-ahead judgment table is also associated with the game state (non-time-saving state/time-saving state). That is, there are look-ahead judgment tables: one used in the non-time-saving state (non-time-saving look-ahead judgment table), and one used in the time-saving state (time-saving look-ahead judgment table).

In other words, the look-ahead judgment tables include a first look-ahead judgment table used when the game is not in a time-saving state, a second look-ahead judgment table used when the game is not in a time-saving state, and a third look-ahead judgment table used when the game is in a time-saving state. Note that the look-ahead judgment tables do not need to be separated for each game state. Also, the types of judgments included in the look-ahead judgment can be changed as appropriate.

3-3. Jackpot Game Next, we will explain jackpot game. Jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play accompanied by the opening and closing of the jackpot opening (first jackpot opening 14 or second jackpot opening 15), an opening (also referred to as OP) from the start of the jackpot game until the start of the first round of play, and an ending (also referred to as ED) from the end of the final round of play until the end of the jackpot game. Each round of play begins with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play or the start of the ending. It is also possible to not have an OP or ED. Note that, hereinafter, a predetermined number of rounds of play (predetermined order) will simply be referred to as a "round." For example, the first round of play will be referred to as "1st round (1R)," and the tenth round of play will be referred to as "10th round (10R)."

The elements that make up such a jackpot game (jackpot game components) include the number of rounds of play, the number of times the large prize openings (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) are opened in each round of play, the type of large prize opening and the opening time for each opening, the time it remains closed until the next opening (closing time or interval time), the opening time (opening time), and the ending time (ending time). After the special symbol is displayed, the pachinko game machine PY1 controls the jackpot game in accordance with a jackpot game control table such as that shown in Figure 14.

As shown in FIG. 14, the jackpot game control table stores jackpot game components for each jackpot game (e.g., jackpot games A-C, X). In each jackpot game, rounds 1 through 15 are played in which the first large prize opening 14 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or in which the first large prize opening 14 is open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. Then, in round 16 (the final round), a round is played in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, or in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, in each round, when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are detected by the large prize opening sensors 14a and 15a, the round is terminated even before the maximum opening time of the large prize openings 14 and 15 has elapsed.

It is possible to configure the system so that jackpot game A shown in FIG. 14 is executed when the type of the winning jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol A, jackpot game B is executed when the type of the winning jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol B, jackpot game C is executed when the type of the winning jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol C, and jackpot game X is executed when the type of the winning jackpot symbol is jackpot symbol X (see FIG. 10 (B)).

The number of times and duration of each jackpot game component can be changed as appropriate. The jackpot game can be played using both the first jackpot opening 14 and the second jackpot opening 15, or just one of them. In a configuration where only the first jackpot opening 14 is used, or where only the second jackpot opening 15 is used, the unused jackpot opening may not be provided. The number of types of jackpot games that can be played may be multiple or just one.

Here, the specific area 16 will be explained in detail. The specific area 16 is placed in a closed state where prizes are not possible and an open state where prizes are possible, by the distribution member 16k. Therefore, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be referred to as the opening/closing mode of the specific area 16. Hereinafter, the operating mode of the distribution member 16k will also be referred to as the "opening/closing mode of the specific area 16." Furthermore, the open state of the specific area 16 will also be referred to as "V-open," and the closed state of the specific area 16 will also be referred to as "V-closed."

The distribution member 16k is controlled in a fixed operating mode (i.e., the specific area 16 is controlled in a fixed opening/closing mode). For example, for 15 seconds after the second large prize opening 15 begins to open, the distribution solenoid 16s is energized and the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state (Figure 3(B)). Therefore, in a round game in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, the relationship between the opening time and timing of the second large prize opening 15 and the time and timing that the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state makes it easy for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to enter the specific area 16). On the other hand, in round play, in which the second large prize opening 15 is open for a maximum of 0.1 seconds, the relationship between the opening time and timing of the second large prize opening 15 and the time and timing for which the distribution member 16k is controlled to the second state makes it nearly impossible (difficult) for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (to enter the specific area 16). In this way, by combining a certain operating mode of the distribution member 16k (a certain opening/closing mode of the specific area 16) with the opening/closing mode of the second large prize opening 15 during a jackpot game, it is possible to set the difficulty (ease) of the game ball entering the specific area 16 during a jackpot game. Note that the operating mode of the distribution member 16k can be changed as appropriate. If a different operating mode is indicated in the description of "Characteristics of the Pachinko Game Machine PY1" below, it will be assumed that the pachinko game machine PY1 employs that operating mode.

Note that during a jackpot game, a jackpot in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the first opening pattern (V-long opening pattern), which makes it easy for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"), is called a "V-long jackpot," and a jackpot in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in the second opening pattern (V-short opening pattern), which makes it difficult or impossible for the game ball to pass through the specific area 16, is called a "V-short jackpot."

3-4. Game States Next, the game states will be explained. As shown in FIG. 15, the pachinko game machine PY1 can be set to any one of the following game states: a "low-probability low base game state," a "low-probability high base game state," a "high-probability low base game state," a "high-probability high base game state," and a "jackpot game state." The "low-probability low base game state" may be abbreviated as the "low-probability low base state," the "low-probability high base game state" as the "low-probability high base state," the "high-probability low base game state" as the "high-probability low base state," and the "high-probability high base game state" as the "high-probability high base state." The game states include a state related to the probability of determining a "jackpot" in the jackpot determination and a state related to the ease of opening the electric chute 12D. The former includes a normal probability state and a high probability state. The latter includes a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state.

The normal probability state is set in a "low probability, low base game state" or a "low probability, high base game state," and is a state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined in a jackpot determination is normal. The high probability state is set in a "high probability, low base game state" or a "high probability, high base game state," and is a state in which the probability of a jackpot being determined in a jackpot determination is higher than the normal probability. Therefore, the high probability state can be said to be a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal probability state. When the pachinko game machine PY1 is first turned on, the normal probability state is set. Then, by winning a jackpot, it is possible to switch from the normal probability state to the high probability state. For example, during a jackpot game, it is possible to switch to the high probability state by the game ball passing through specific area 16. It is also possible to switch to the high probability state based on the type of jackpot symbol. Whether the trigger for switching to the high probability state is the passing of a V or the type of jackpot symbol can be determined appropriately depending on the gameplay characteristics desired. In the high probability state, a predetermined number of jackpot determinations can be made without winning a jackpot, or by winning the next jackpot, it is possible to switch from the high probability state to the normal probability state.

The non-time-saving state is set in the "low-probability, low-base game state," "high-probability, low-base game state," or "jackpot game state." The time-saving state is set in the "low-probability, high-base game state" or "high-probability, high-base game state," and is a game state in which the electric chute 12D is more likely to open for a longer period of time during a single supplementary game compared to the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, the electric chute 12D is open for a longer period (e.g., 3.0 seconds) than in the non-time-saving state (e.g., 0.08 seconds). Furthermore, in the time-saving state, the special symbol fluctuation pattern is determined according to a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is designed to select a special symbol fluctuation pattern with a shorter special symbol fluctuation time more frequently than in the non-time-saving state (see Figures 11 and 12). As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of reserved special symbols is increased, making it easier for valid winnings (winnings that can be stored as reserved special symbols) to occur in the starting slot. This allows for smooth gameplay and the aim of winning a jackpot.

In addition, the normal map variation time is more likely to be shorter in the time-saving state than in the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, the normal map variation time (5 seconds) is determined, which is shorter than the normal map variation time (30 seconds) determined in the non-time-saving state (Figure 9 (B)). Therefore, the number of normal map lottery draws per unit time is greater in the time-saving state.

In addition, the time-saving state is more likely to be judged as a hit in the hit detection process than the non-time-saving state. For example, in the time-saving state, a hit is detected with a higher probability (e.g., 59,936/65,536) than the probability of a hit being detected in the non-time-saving state (e.g., 6,600/65,536) (Figure 9 (A)). Therefore, the time-saving state is judged as a hit more often per unit time.

In this way, in the time-saving state, the electric chute 12D remains open for a longer period of time per unit of time compared to the non-time-saving state, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole 12 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of balls fired, becomes higher. Therefore, in the time-saving state, where the base is high, players can aim for a jackpot without significantly reducing the number of game balls they have. Therefore, it can be said that the time-saving state is a game state that is more advantageous to players than the non-time-saving state.

When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is first powered on, it is set to the non-time-saving mode. Then, for example, the time-saving mode can be set by winning a jackpot. In the time-saving mode, a predetermined number of jackpot determinations can be made without winning a jackpot, or the machine can change from the time-saving mode to the non-time-saving mode by winning the next jackpot.

In addition, in the time-shortened state, compared to the non-time-shortened state, it is easier to win, the normal symbol fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter, and the electric chute 12D is more likely to be open for a longer time during one supplementary play. In other words, three points are set to be advantageous to the player when playing normal symbols. However, these points may only be part of these. Furthermore, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table in the time-shortened state does not have to be one that makes it easier to select special symbol fluctuation patterns with shorter special symbol fluctuation times than in the non-time-shortened state.

After the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is first powered on, the gaming state is a "low probability, low base gaming state" in which the normal probability state and non-time-saving state are set. This gaming state is also called the "normal gaming state." In the "jackpot gaming state," a normal lottery (a hit determination for a normal lottery) is conducted, but a special lottery (a hit determination for a jackpot) is not conducted, so a non-time-saving state is set upon the start of the jackpot game. It is also possible to use all or some of the gaming states described above. The various gaming states described in this specification can be arbitrarily expressed in the form of an "nth gaming state" (n is an integer greater than or equal to 1).

4. Main Effects of the Gaming Machine Next, the main effects performed by the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described with reference to FIGS.

4-1. Presentation Mode First, the presentation mode will be explained. Presentation mode refers to a category of presentation (or a higher-level conceptual attribute). The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can set the following presentation modes: customer waiting presentation mode, normal presentation mode, probability variation presentation mode, time-saving presentation mode, and jackpot presentation mode.

The customer waiting mode can be set when special symbol variation effects are not being performed in the "low probability low base game state," "low probability high base game state," "high probability low base game state," and "high probability high base game state." This mode indicates a standby state in which special symbol variation effects are not being performed. When the customer waiting mode is set, customer waiting effects are performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 16 (A-1), a customer waiting demo video G100 introducing the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is displayed on the display unit 50a during customer waiting effects. Furthermore, when the normal button 40 is operated while the customer waiting demo video G100 is being displayed, a settings screen G101 is displayed, as shown in FIG. 16 (A-2), for configuring settings related to the effects of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Settings related to effects include the volume of the sound output from the speaker 52, the brightness of the display unit 50a, and the frequency of effects that are executed.

The normal presentation mode can be set when a special symbol variation presentation is being performed in a "low-probability, low-base game state" or a "high-probability, low-base game state," and is a presentation mode that indicates a non-time-saving mode. The normal presentation modes include, for example, a first normal presentation mode in which a background image depicting a daytime mountain scene (normal daytime background image G102) is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 16 (B-1); a second normal presentation mode in which a background image depicting an evening mountain scene (normal evening background image G103) is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 16 (B-2); and a third normal presentation mode in which a background image depicting a nighttime mountain scene (normal nighttime background image G104) is displayed on the display unit 50a as shown in FIG. 16 (B-3). Switching between these modes is based on one condition: the special symbol variation presentation being performed one or more times without a jackpot being won. Furthermore, each of the first to third normal presentation modes has a normal early presentation mode before a reach is achieved in the special chart variation presentation, and a normal late presentation mode after a reach is achieved. In the normal early presentation mode, one of the daytime normal background image G102, evening normal background image G103, or nighttime normal background image G104 is displayed on the display unit 50a, while in the normal late presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed. In addition, a special presentation mode that is set only in the "high probability low base game state" may be provided.

The probability variation presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a special symbol variation presentation is being performed in a "high probability, high base game state," and is a presentation mode that indicates a high probability state and a time-saving state. In the probability variation presentation mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-4), a background image representing space (probability variation background image G105) is displayed on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, the probability variation presentation mode includes a probability variation pre-stage presentation mode before a reach is achieved in the special symbol variation presentation, and a probability variation post-stage presentation mode after a reach is achieved. In the probability variation pre-stage presentation mode, the probability variation background image G105 is displayed on the display unit 50a, while in the probability variation post-stage presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The time-saving presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a special symbol variation presentation is being performed in a "low probability, high base game state," and is a presentation mode that indicates that the normal probability state and the time-saving state are in effect. In the time-saving presentation mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 16 (B-5), a background image representing the sky (time-saving background image G106) is displayed on the display unit 50a. Furthermore, the time-saving presentation mode includes a pre-time-saving presentation mode before a reach is achieved in the special symbol variation presentation, and a post-time-saving presentation mode after a reach is achieved. In the pre-time-saving presentation mode, the time-saving background image G106 is displayed on the display unit 50a, while in the post-time-saving presentation mode, a dedicated background image corresponding to the type of reach is displayed.

The jackpot presentation mode is a presentation mode that can be set when a jackpot game is being played in the "jackpot game state," and is a presentation mode that indicates that a jackpot game is being played. In the jackpot presentation mode, for example, during the opening of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-1), the display unit 50a displays a jackpot opening presentation in which an opening image G107 suggesting the start of the jackpot game and a right-hit image G108 encouraging a "right hit" are displayed. During a round of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-2), the display unit 50a displays a round presentation in which a round image G109 indicating the number of rounds and a prize ball number image G110 indicating the number of prize balls paid out are displayed. During the ending of a jackpot game, as shown in FIG. 16 (C-3), the display unit 50a displays a jackpot ending presentation in which an ending image G111 suggesting the presentation mode that will be set after the jackpot game and a total prize ball number image G112 indicating the total number of prize balls paid out are displayed.

The types of presentation modes can be changed or added as appropriate.

4-2. Special symbol variation effect Next, the special symbol variation effect (also simply referred to as "variation effect") will be explained. When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts the variable display of the special symbol, it executes the special symbol variation effect based on the special symbol variation pattern related to the variable display of the special symbol and the special symbol lottery result (jackpot determination result, jackpot symbol type determination result, reach determination result, and special symbol variation pattern determination result). In the special symbol variation effect, the display unit 50a displays the variation of the effect symbol superimposed on a predetermined background image. In the variable display of the effect symbol, the effect symbol changes and then stops. In other words, after the special symbol variation time and the variable display of the effect symbol are performed, the variation stops and the effect symbol is displayed as still. Then, the result of the special symbol lottery is announced by the stopped display of the effect symbol.

In addition to the display of changing special symbols, other effects can be produced using various display devices such as the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, normal button 40, and special button 41. In this case, other effects can continue to be produced even after the display of the stopped symbol.

4-2-1. Display Area of the Display Unit 50a of the Image Display Device 50, as shown in Figure 17 (A), the display unit 50a can be divided horizontally into three approximately equal parts, with a left display area 50b1, a middle display area 50b2, and a right display area 50b3 on the left, center, and right sides. The left display area 50b1 is an area that displays the left display area EZ1 when the display area is stopped during the special variable display. Similarly, the middle display area 50b2 and the right display area 50b3 are areas that display the middle display area EZ2 and the right display area EZ3.

In addition, as shown in Figure 17(A), a small symbol area 50c can be provided in a section at the left end (upper left corner) of the top edge of the display unit 50a. The small symbol area 50c is an area that variably displays the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 when the special symbol is being displayed variably.

In Figure 17(A), the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c are clearly indicated by dashed double-dashed lines, but this is only to indicate the range of the left performance pattern area 50b1, the middle performance pattern area 50b2, the right performance pattern area 50b3, and the small pattern area 50c, and is not actually displayed. Furthermore, the range of each area can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-2. Normal Variation In the special symbol variation effect, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 can first perform a normal variation. The normal variation functions as an effect that indicates that the variable display of the special symbol has begun.

When the variable display of the special chart begins, for example, as shown in Figure 17 (A), the left performance pattern EZ1, middle performance pattern EZ2 and right performance pattern EZ3 are displayed frozen on the display unit 50a, and the left small pattern KZ1, middle small pattern KZ2 and right small pattern KZ3 are displayed frozen, and the variable display of the special chart is not being performed and the state is waiting for the variable display of the special chart.As shown in Figure 17 (B), as the display begins, the variable display of the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2 and EZ3 begins, and the variable display of the small patterns KZ1, KZ2 and KZ3 begins. Then, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, a "normal miss variation," as shown in FIG. 17 (C-1), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stop in different stop patterns, and then, as shown in FIG. 17 (D), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 stop and display in a stop pattern suggesting a miss (so-called "variable pattern"). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 also stop and display simultaneously in a stop pattern suggesting a miss. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, a special symbol variation pattern with a reach, such as an "N miss variation," as shown in FIG. 17 (C-2), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 temporarily stop in the same stop pattern, and a reach is established. At this time, the variable display of the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 continues, and a reach performance is performed according to the special symbol variation pattern. The stopping order and stopping pattern of the EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 symbols can be changed as appropriate.

4-2-3. N Reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform N Reach when a reach is achieved during normal variation. N Reach is a presentation that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination may be a "jackpot," and functions as a presentation to make the player expect a jackpot.

In an N reach, as shown in Figure 18 (A), the reach state is maintained for a predetermined time (e.g., 10 seconds), and as shown in Figure 18 (B), the rate of change of the middle effect symbol EZ2 gradually slows down. If the special symbol change pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N miss change," then, as shown in Figure 18 (C-1), the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a miss (so-called "variant numbers"), as indicated by the symbols. At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a miss. On the other hand, if the special symbol change pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "N jackpot change," then, as shown in Figure 18 (C-2), the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot (so-called "double numbers"). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot. Note that the effects of N Reach are not limited to the gradual slowdown of the EZ2 middle effect symbol, and can be changed or added as appropriate.

Furthermore, with regard to the stopping patterns of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that indicate a miss, the spread symbols when a reach is not achieved are referred to as "non-reach spread symbols" or "non-reach miss symbols," and the spread symbols when a reach is achieved are referred to as "reach spread symbols" or "reach miss symbols." The combination of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that make up the non-reach spread symbols (for example, "2, 3, 1" or "5, 8, 6") and the combination of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that make up the reach spread symbols (for example, "2, 1, 2" or "5, 4, 5") are selected by the effect control microcomputer 121. Additionally, the combination of the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 that make up the stopping pattern (double number) that indicates a jackpot (for example, "2-2-2" or "7-7-7") is selected by the effect control microcomputer 121 based on the type of jackpot symbol that has been won.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform an SP reach after an N reach. The SP reach is a presentation that suggests that the result of the jackpot determination is more likely to be a "jackpot" than an N reach, and functions as a presentation to make the player expect a jackpot.

In an SP Reach, after an N Reach, for example, as shown in FIG. 19(A), a background image dedicated to the SP Reach (SP Reach background image G113) is displayed on the display unit 50a, and an image indicating that the SP Reach has begun (SP Reach start title image) G1 is displayed in the center of the display unit 50a. Then, as shown in FIG. 19(B), a special SP Reach effect (e.g., a battle effect) is performed. Then, when the final stage of the special Reach effect is reached, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP jackpot variation," then, as shown in FIG. 19(C-1), a presentation suggesting a jackpot (e.g., a display in which the main character (ally character) has won the battle and is standing with their arms crossed) is performed on the display unit 50a, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed in a stopping pattern suggesting a jackpot (so-called double numbers). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a manner suggesting a big win. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pattern of the variable display of the special symbol is, for example, "SP miss variation," then, as shown in FIG. 19 (C-2), an effect suggesting a miss (for example, a display of an enemy character standing in a pose of defiance after winning a battle) is displayed, and the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a miss (so-called barakeme). At this time, the small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 are also displayed stopped all at once in a manner suggesting a miss. The effect content of the SP reach can be changed or added as appropriate.

Here, we will explain in detail the possibility (jackpot expectation) of the EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 display symbols for each reach stopping in a manner indicating a jackpot. The jackpot expectation for each reach is determined by the execution probability based on the result of the jackpot determination. For example, if the execution probability of an N reach is set to 10% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 100% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," and the execution probability of an SP reach is set to 4% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 100% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," then it is possible to set the jackpot expectation for an SP reach higher than the jackpot expectation for an N reach. Furthermore, if SP Reach A and SP Reach B are made executable as SP reaches, and the execution probability of SP Reach A is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 30% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," and the execution probability of SP Reach B is set to 2% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and 20% if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," it is possible to set the jackpot expectation rate for SP Reach A higher than that of SP Reach B. In this way, by appropriately setting the execution probability according to the result of the jackpot determination, it is possible to set the jackpot expectation rate.

4-2-5. L Reach The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform an L Reach after an N Reach. The L Reach is a presentation that suggests that the result of the special chart lottery is likely to be a "jackpot," lower than an SP Reach but higher than an N Reach, and functions as a presentation that makes the player anticipate a jackpot. Note that the execution time of the L Reach reach presentation is shorter than that of the SP Reach reach presentation (FIGS. 11 and 12). Therefore, in the L Reach reach presentation, for example, a video shorter than that of the SP Reach reach presentation is displayed on the display unit 50a. Note that the content of the L Reach reach presentation can be changed as appropriate. Also, a special chart variation pattern may be provided in which the L Reach reach presentation is followed by the SP Reach reach presentation.

4-3. Hold Icon Display Area The display unit 50a of the image display device 50 can be provided with a hold icon display area 50d consisting of four display areas, as shown in FIG. 20A. The hold icon display area 50d is composed of a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4. A hold icon HA can be displayed in each display area 50d1, 50d2, 50d3, or 50d4 depending on the number of special 1 or special 2 reservations. For example, if the number of special 1 reservations is "1," the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1, and if the number of special 1 reservations is "2," the hold icon HA is displayed in both the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 20(A), it is possible to provide an icon display area 50e consisting of a single display area near the hold icon display area 50d. In response to the start of the special chart change presentation, the icon display area 50e can display the icon TA (also referred to as the hold icon TA) that is the same as the hold icon HA. Note that the icon TA may be an icon different from the hold icon HA.

The number of display areas that make up the hold icon display area 50d can be changed as appropriate. It is also possible for the hold icon display area 50d to be a display area that displays both the special chart 1 hold number and the special chart 2 hold number, or a display area that displays only one of them. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the hold icon display area 50d is provided but the icon display area 50e is not provided, or to have neither.

The pachinko game machine PY1 can perform a hold effect in response to a game ball entering the first start hole 11 or the second start hole 12. The hold effect can notify the player of the number of special 1 reserves or special 2 reserves.

In the hold effect, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 while the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 is "0," the special chart change effect begins, and the icon TA is displayed in the icon display area 50e, as shown in FIG. 20(B). Then, when two more game balls enter the first starting hole 11 during the special chart change effect, the hold icon HA is displayed in the first display area 50d1 and the second display area 50d2 of the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 20(C), and the player is notified that the number of reserved balls in special chart 1 is "2." After that, when the special symbol variation effect ends and a new special symbol variation effect begins, as shown in FIG. 20(D), the reserved icon HA displayed in the first display area 50d1 of the reserved icon display area 50d moves to the icon display area 50e and is displayed as the reserved icon TA, and the reserved icon HA displayed in the second display area 50d2 of the reserved icon display area 50d moves to the first display area 50d1 and is displayed, notifying the player that the reserved number for special symbol 1 is "1." Both the reserved icon TA and the reserved icon HA indicate the existence of a right to a jackpot determination that has arisen in response to the game ball entering the first starting hole 11 or the second starting hole 12. The reserved icon TA is appropriately hidden (erased) upon the jackpot determination being performed and the result being notified. Furthermore, the reserved icon TA and the reserved icon HA do not necessarily have to be displayed all the time. For example, the icon TA and the reserved icon HA may both be displayed at the start of the special chart change performance (when the performance pattern starts to change) and at the end of the special chart change performance (when the changed performance pattern is stopped and displayed), and neither may be displayed during an SP reach. Also, for example, the icon TA may be displayed during an SP reach, and the reserved icon HA may be hidden.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a preview performance at any timing during the special chart variation performance. The preview performance is a performance using the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, movable devices 55, 56, 58, input devices (normal button 40, special button 41), etc., and can suggest the results of the jackpot determination and the special chart variation pattern determination.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a movable body effect as a preview effect using the movable devices 55, 56, and 58. The movable body effect is an effect in which the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 are activated, and functions as an effect to make the player anticipate a jackpot.

In the moving object presentation, for example, when an N reach progresses to an SP reach, as shown in FIG. 21(A), the above-board moving device 55 and the below-board moving device 56 are activated, and the above-board moving device 55k and the below-board moving device 56k move to overlap on the display unit 50a, suggesting the progression to an SP reach. At this time, an effect image is displayed in the space on the display unit 50a that does not overlap with the above-board moving device 55k and the below-board moving device 56k. Then, as shown in FIG. 21(B), the above-board moving device 55k and the below-board moving device 56k return to their normal standby state (initial position), progressing to an SP reach. This moving object presentation is an example of a progression presentation. Note that the moving object presentation is not limited to suggesting progression to an SP reach, and can be modified or added as appropriate. Furthermore, the operation of the moving devices in the moving object presentation can be modified or added as appropriate. Additionally, if the effect does not develop (for example, in the case of an N miss variation), it is possible to perform a moving object effect as a so-called false effect.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform operation effects as advance notice effects using the normal buttons 40 and the special buttons 41. The operation effects are effects that prompt the player to operate the normal buttons 40 and the special buttons 41, and function as effects that make the player anticipate a jackpot.

In the operation presentation, for example, in an SP reach, a period (valid operation period) occurs during which pressing the input device (special button 41) is valid. When this valid operation period begins, an operation prompt (operation prompt) is presented, as shown in FIG. 22(A). In the operation prompt presentation, an operation prompt image G3 is displayed on the display unit 50a. The operation prompt image G3 includes an image (special button image G31) that resembles the special button 41, an image (press operation image G32) that represents the operation mode of the special button 41 (i.e., the press operation), and an image (remaining valid operation period image G33) that represents the remaining time of the valid operation period. The remaining valid operation period image G33 is comprised of a generally curved progress bar that changes over time to allow the player to easily understand the remaining time of the valid operation period. Thereafter, in response to the special button 41 being pressed during the valid operation period, or after the valid operation period has elapsed without the special button 41 being operated, the on-board movable device 55 is activated as shown in FIG. 22(B), and the on-board movable body 55k moves to overlap the display unit 50a, indicating the likelihood of a jackpot. Note that the operation effects are not limited to the activation of the on-board movable device 55, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Furthermore, operation promotion effects that encourage the operation of operating means (operation units) such as the special button 41 or normal button 40 are sometimes referred to as operation instruction effects.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 can perform a pre-reading effect for the special chart 1 reserve or special chart 2 reserve for which the special chart lottery has not yet been held as a notice effect. The pre-reading effect functions as an effect to suggest in advance the result of the special chart lottery for the special chart 1 reserve or special chart 2 reserve.

In a pre-reading effect, for example, if the result of the pre-reading judgment for the special chart 1 hold is a "jackpot," the hold icon HA, which is normally displayed as a "circle," may be displayed as a "☆" in the hold icon display area 50d, as shown in FIG. 20 (C). Furthermore, if the result of the pre-reading judgment is a "miss," the hold icon HA may be displayed as a "☆" as a so-called false effect. This pre-reading effect, in which the hold icon HA or the icon TA is displayed in a special mode ("☆" in this embodiment) rather than the normal mode ("circle" in this embodiment), is called a hold change effect. Furthermore, the hold icon HA and the icon TA are collectively referred to as the hold display. In this embodiment, the hold icon HA and the icon TA are displayed as the hold display, but it is also possible to display only the hold icon HA and not the icon TA. Furthermore, the timing for the special mode of hold display in the hold change presentation may be when the start winning event that triggers the hold display occurs, when the hold display shifts (when the display area of the hold icon HA is changed), or when the special chart change corresponding to the hold display is in progress (when it is displayed as the icon TA). There may also be multiple types of special modes for the hold display.

Note that the predictive effect can be performed on both or either the special chart 1 reserve and the special chart 2 reserve. Furthermore, predictive effects are not limited to changes in the display mode of the reserve icon HA, and can be changed or added as appropriate. Examples of predictive effects other than reserve change effects include so-called continuous previews.

5. Game Control by Game Control Microcomputer 101 Next, game control by game control microcomputer 101 will be explained with reference to Figures 23 and 24. Note that counters, timers, buffers, etc. that appear in the game control by game control microcomputer 101 described below are provided in game RAM 104.

[1. Main control main processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, the gaming control microcomputer 101 provided on the main control board 100 reads out and executes the main control main processing program shown in Fig. 23 from the gaming ROM 103. As shown in the figure, the main control main processing first performs power-on processing (S001). The power-on processing performs settings such as permission to access the gaming RAM 104, settings for the gaming CPU 102, and settings for the SIO, PIO, and CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time).

Following the power-on process, interrupts are prohibited (S002), and the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) is executed. In this normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003), the counter values of the various random numbers shown in Figures 8(A) and 8(B) are updated by incrementing them by 1. When the counter value of each random number reaches its upper limit, it returns to "0" and is incremented again. Note that the initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0", and may be changed randomly. Furthermore, at least some of the random numbers may be so-called hardware random numbers generated using a known random number generation circuit consisting of a counter IC or the like.

When the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is completed, an interrupt is permitted (S004). While the interrupt is permitted, the main timer interrupt process (S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed based on an interrupt pulse repeatedly input to the gaming CPU 102, for example, at a cycle of 4 msec. In other words, the main timer interrupt process (S005) is executed at a cycle of 4 msec. Then, between the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005), the update process of the counter values of various random numbers by the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S003) is repeatedly executed. Note that if an interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 while the interrupt is prohibited, the main timer interrupt process (S005) does not start immediately, but starts after the interrupt is permitted (S004).

[2. Main-side timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main timer interrupt process (S005) will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, the main timer interrupt process (S005) first executes an output process (S101). In the output process (S101), commands and the like set in the output buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 of the main control board 100 in each process described below are output to the sub-control board 120, the payout control board 170, and the like. Specifically, for example, the commands output here include a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls detected by a sensor (such as the first large prize opening sensor 14a) provided in each prize opening, and a payout command indicating the number of payouts paid out in response to detection by the prize ball sensor 73a.

In the input process (S102) that follows the output process (S101), the game control microcomputer 101, for example, receives a detection signal from a lower tray full switch that detects whether the lower tray 35 is full, and stores this as lower tray full data in the output buffer of the game RAM 104.

The normal and special symbol main random number update process (S103) that is performed next is the same as the normal and special symbol main random number update process (S003) that is performed in the main control main process of Figure 23. In other words, the update process for the counter values of the various random numbers shown in Figures 8(A) and 8(B) is performed both during the execution period of the main timer interrupt process (S005) and during other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt process (S005) until the start of the next main timer interrupt process (S005)).

Following the normal symbol/special symbol main random number update process (S103), the game control microcomputer 101 performs a sensor detection process (S104), then a normal action process (S105), and then a special action process (S106). The sensor detection process, normal action process, and special action process will be described later.

Following the special operation process (S106), a sorting device control process is performed to control the sorting device 16D (S107). The sorting device 16D is operated when a special game using the second special prize device 15D is being played. However, the sorting device 16D may also be operated in a constant manner from the time the power is turned on.

Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes other processing (S108) and ends the main timer interrupt processing (S005). Other processing (S108) includes power-off monitoring processing when the power is cut off and updating the timer provided in the game RAM 104. Other processing (S108) also includes payout control processing, which pays out prize balls to the player. In the payout control processing, a prize ball request signal is sent to the payout control board 170 in response to the entry of game balls into each winning slot. In other words, the payout control board 170 pays out prize balls based on the prize ball request signal.

The gaming control microcomputer 101 then repeatedly executes steps S002 to S004 of the main control main processing until the next interrupt pulse is input to the gaming CPU 102 (see Figure 23). When the interrupt pulse is input (approximately 4 msec later), it again executes the main timer interrupt processing (S005). In the output processing (S101) of the re-executed main timer interrupt processing (S005), the gaming control microcomputer 101 outputs the commands, etc. that were set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104 in the previous main timer interrupt processing (S005).

[2-1. Sensor detection process]
In the sensor detection process (S104), the general winning slot sensor process, the gate sensor process, the second starting slot sensor process, the first starting slot sensor process, the first large winning slot sensor process, the second large winning slot sensor process, and the specific area sensor process are sequentially performed. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The general prize opening sensor process determines whether a game ball has been detected by the general prize opening sensor 10a. Furthermore, a command for the general prize opening sensor is generated based on the results of this process.

The gate sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has been detected, the normal symbol random number indicated by the counter value of the normal symbol random number counter is obtained, and the obtained normal symbol random number is stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106 provided in the gaming RAM 104. Note that if a predetermined number of normal symbol random numbers (for example, four) are stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106, the newly obtained normal symbol random number is not stored. Furthermore, a command for the gate sensor is generated depending on the results of this process.

The second start opening sensor processing determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the second start opening sensor 12a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has been detected, special symbol 2-related random numbers consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter are acquired, and the acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers are stored in the special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b has multiple memory areas from area 1 to area n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2, for example, "4"), and the acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers are stored in order starting from area 1. Note that if special symbol 2-related random numbers have been stored up to area n, newly acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers are not stored. In addition, a second look-ahead determination is performed using the acquired special symbol 2-related random numbers and a second look-ahead determination table. In addition, depending on the results of this processing, a command for the second start gate sensor is generated, which includes a special chart 2 reserved number command indicating the number of special chart 2 related random numbers (special chart 2 reserved number) stored in the special chart 2 reserved memory unit 105b and a second start winning command indicating the result of the second pre-reading judgment.

The first start gate sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the first start gate sensor 11a. If it is determined that a gaming ball has been detected, special symbol 1 related random numbers consisting of a special symbol random number counter, a jackpot symbol type random number counter, a reach random number counter, and a special symbol variation pattern random number counter are acquired, and the acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers are stored in the special symbol 1 reserve memory unit 105a provided in the gaming RAM 104. The special symbol 1 reserve memory unit 105a has multiple memory areas from area 1 to area n (n is an integer greater than or equal to 2, for example, "4"), and the acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers are stored in order starting from area 1. Note that if special symbol 1 related random numbers have been stored up to area n, newly acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers are not stored. In addition, a first pre-reading judgment is performed using the acquired special symbol 1 related random numbers and the first pre-reading judgment table. In addition, depending on the results of this processing, a command for the first start gate sensor is generated, which includes a special chart 1 reserved number command representing the number of special chart 1-related random numbers (special chart 1 reserved number) stored in the special chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a and a first start winning command representing the result of the first pre-read judgment.

The first large prize opening sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the first large prize opening sensor 14a. It also generates a command for the first large prize opening sensor according to the results of this process.

The second large prize opening sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the second large prize opening sensor 15a. It also generates a command for the second large prize opening sensor according to the results of this process.

The specific area sensor process determines whether a gaming ball has been detected by the specific area sensor 16a. Furthermore, a command for the specific area sensor is generated depending on the results of this process.

[2-2. Normal Operation Processing]
In the normal operation process (S105), normal symbol standby process, normal symbol variation process, normal symbol determination process, and auxiliary game control process are performed in sequence. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

The normal symbol standby process is a process that is performed during standby when the variable display of the normal symbol and auxiliary play are not being performed. In the normal symbol standby process, a win determination is made based on the normal symbol random number stored in the normal symbol reserve memory unit 106. In addition, a normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination is made based on the current game state to determine the normal symbol fluctuation pattern. A normal symbol fluctuation start command is then generated that includes information regarding the results of the win determination and the normal symbol fluctuation pattern. Then, the normal symbol display unit 82 is caused to start variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal symbol fluctuation time associated with the determined normal symbol fluctuation pattern.

Normal pattern change processing is a process that is performed during the variable display of the normal map. In the normal pattern change processing, the normal map is stopped and displayed based on the result of the hit determination as the normal map change time elapses since the variable display of the currently running normal map began. Then, a normal map change stop command is generated, indicating the end of the variable display of the normal map.

The normal symbol determination process is performed when a normal symbol is displayed as stopped. During the normal symbol determination process, a determination is made as to whether the stopped normal symbol is a winning symbol after a predetermined stop time (e.g., 0.8 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the stopped display of the active normal symbol. If a winning symbol is displayed as stopped, auxiliary play is started based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table, and an auxiliary game start command indicating the start of auxiliary play is generated.

The auxiliary game control process is performed when an auxiliary game is being played. The auxiliary game control process controls the auxiliary game based on the current game state and the auxiliary game control table. Furthermore, an auxiliary game control command is generated depending on the results of this process.

[2-3. Special Action Processing]
In the special operation process (S106), the following processes are sequentially performed: special symbol standby process, special symbol variation process, special symbol determination process, jackpot game control process, and game state setting process. Then, the commands generated in each process are set in the output buffer of the gaming RAM 104.

[2-3-1. Special symbol standby process]
The special symbol standby process is a process that is performed not in a jackpot game state but during standby when the variable display of the special symbol is not being performed. In the special symbol standby process, based on the special symbol 2 related random number stored in the special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b, a special symbol 2 determination process and a special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process are performed, and a special symbol 2 reserve memory unit shift process is also performed. Also, based on the special symbol 1 related random number stored in the special symbol 1 reserve memory unit 105a, a special symbol 1 determination process and a special symbol 1 variation pattern determination process are performed, and a special symbol 1 reserve memory unit shift process is also performed.

In the special symbol 2 determination process, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether there is a jackpot or a miss using the special symbol random number among the special symbol 2 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special symbol 2 reserved memory unit 105b and a jackpot determination table corresponding to the current game state. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol type determination is made to determine the type of jackpot symbol using the jackpot symbol type random number among the special symbol 2 related random numbers and the special symbol 2 jackpot symbol type determination table. A symbol designation command indicating the determined jackpot symbol type is then generated. If the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, a symbol designation command indicating a miss is generated. Note that multiple types of misses may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, the type of the miss symbol may be determined. In this case, the symbol designation command may include information indicating the type of miss symbol.

The special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special symbol 2 determination process. In the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process, the special symbol 2 variation pattern is determined using the special symbol variation pattern random number among the special symbol 2 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b and a special symbol 2 variation pattern determination table corresponding to the current game state. In the special symbol 2 variation pattern determination process when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, a reach determination is made, and the special symbol 2 variation pattern is determined based on the result of that reach determination. Note that the determination of the special symbol 2 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special symbol 2 related random numbers stored in the special symbol 2 reserve memory unit 105b (special symbol 2 reserve number). Then, a special symbol 2 variation start command representing the determined special symbol 2 variation pattern is generated. The special symbol 2 variation start command includes information regarding the special symbol 2, information regarding the result of the jackpot determination, information regarding the result of the jackpot pattern type determination, information regarding the reach determination, and information regarding the special symbol variation time associated with the special symbol 2 variation pattern. Then, the special chart 2 display 81b starts variable display of the special chart 2 based on the special chart fluctuation time associated with the determined special chart 2 fluctuation pattern.

Special chart 2 reserved memory unit shift processing is a process performed when special chart 2 determination processing and special chart 2 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In special chart 2 reserved memory unit shift processing, the special chart 2 related random numbers stored in the special chart 2 reserved memory unit 105b are shifted one position toward the first area, and the special chart 2 related random numbers in the first area are cleared from the special chart 2 reserved memory unit 105b. In this way, the special chart 2 related random numbers are consumed in the order in which they were obtained. Then, a special chart 2 reserved number command is generated that represents the special chart 2 reserved number after this processing.

In the special symbol 1 determination process, a jackpot determination is made to determine whether there is a jackpot or a miss using the special symbol random number among the special symbol 1 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special symbol 1 reserved memory unit 105a and a jackpot determination table corresponding to the current game state. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol type determination is made to determine the type of jackpot symbol using the jackpot symbol type random number among the special symbol 1 related random numbers and the special symbol 1 jackpot symbol type determination table. A symbol designation command indicating the determined jackpot symbol type is then generated. If the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, a symbol designation command indicating a miss is generated. Note that multiple types of misses may be provided, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, the type of the miss symbol may be determined. In this case, the symbol designation command may include information indicating the type of miss symbol.

The special chart 1 variation pattern determination process is a process performed after the special chart 1 determination process. In the special chart 1 variation pattern determination process, the special chart 1 variation pattern is determined using the special chart variation pattern random numbers among the special chart 1 related random numbers stored in the first area of the special chart 1 reserve memory unit 105a and a special chart 1 variation pattern determination table corresponding to the current game state. In the special chart 1 variation pattern determination process when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, a reach determination is made, and the special chart 1 variation pattern is determined based on the result of that reach determination. Note that the determination of the special chart 1 variation pattern is also associated with the number of special chart 1 related random numbers stored in the special chart 1 reserve memory unit 105a (special chart 1 reserve number). Then, a special chart 1 variation start command representing the determined special chart 1 variation pattern is generated. The special chart 1 variation start command includes information regarding the special chart 1, information regarding the result of the jackpot determination, information regarding the result of the jackpot pattern type determination, information regarding the result of the reach determination, and information regarding the special chart variation time associated with the special chart 1 variation pattern. Then, the special chart 1 display 81a starts variable display of the special chart 1 based on the special chart fluctuation time associated with the determined special chart 1 fluctuation pattern.

Special chart 1 reserved memory unit shift processing is a process performed when special chart 1 determination processing and special chart 1 variation pattern determination processing are performed. In special chart 1 reserved memory unit shift processing, the special chart 1 related random numbers stored in the special chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a are shifted one to the first area, and the special chart 1 related random numbers in the first area are cleared from the special chart 1 reserved memory unit 105a. In this way, the special chart 1 related random numbers are consumed in the order in which they were obtained. Then, a special chart 1 reserved number command is generated that represents the special chart 1 reserved number after this processing.

Note that if both the number of reserved special charts 2 and the number of reserved special charts 1 exist, the special chart 2 determination process takes priority, and the variable display of special chart 2 and the variable display of special chart 1 are not performed in parallel. In other words, if there is a reserved special chart 2, the game control microcomputer 101 will not perform the special chart 1 determination process even if there is a reserved special chart 1. Note that the variable display of special chart 2 and the variable display of special chart 1 may be configured to be performed in the order of winning, or to be performed simultaneously.

[2-3-2. Special symbol variation processing]
The special symbol variation process is a process performed during the variable display of the special symbol. In the special symbol variation process, as the special symbol variation time elapses, the special symbol display device 81 ends the variable display of the special symbol and stops displaying the special symbol according to the result of the jackpot determination. If the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot is stopped and displayed, and if the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, the miss symbol indicating a miss is stopped and displayed. Then, a special symbol variation stop command indicating the end of the variable display of the special symbol is generated.

[2-3-3. Special symbol determination process]
The special symbol determination process is a process performed when a special symbol is stopped and displayed. In the special symbol determination process, if the currently stopped special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the game transitions to a jackpot game state. An opening command indicating the start of a jackpot game is then generated. The opening command includes information regarding the result of the jackpot symbol type determination. If the currently stopped special symbol is a losing symbol and the high probability state is to be ended, a normal probability state is set. A high probability end command indicating a transition to the normal probability state is then generated. If the currently stopped special symbol is a losing symbol and the time-saving state is to be ended, a non-time-saving state is set. A time-saving end command indicating a transition to a non-time-saving state is then generated. If the currently stopped special symbol is a losing symbol and the number of reserved special symbols 2 and 1 is "0", a customer waiting command indicating that the pachinko game machine PY1 is in a standby state is then generated.

[2-3-4. Jackpot game control process]
The jackpot game control process is a process performed in the jackpot game state. In the jackpot game control process, a jackpot game is played in accordance with the jackpot game control table. After transitioning to the jackpot game state, each round of play begins according to the passage of the opening time or closing time. Then, a round game command indicating the start of the round of play is generated. Furthermore, an ending is started according to the end of the final round of play. Then, an ending command indicating the end of the jackpot game is generated. The ending command includes information regarding the result of the jackpot symbol type determination.

[2-3-5. Game status setting process]
The gaming state setting process is a process performed when the jackpot gaming state ends. In the gaming state setting process, when changing from a normal probability state to a high probability state, the high probability state is set when the jackpot gaming state ends. When limiting the duration of the high probability state, the duration of the high probability state (for example, the number of times the special symbol is variable displayed that the high probability state can continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, a high probability setting command indicating the setting of the high probability state is generated. Furthermore, when changing from a non-time-saving state to a time-saving state, the time-saving state is set when the jackpot gaming state ends. When limiting the duration of the time-saving state, the duration of the time-saving state (for example, the number of times the special symbol is variable displayed that the time-saving state can continue without winning a jackpot) is also set. Then, a time-saving setting command indicating the setting of the time-saving state is generated.

Note that the commands generated by the game control microcomputer 101 for each process can be added or modified as appropriate.

6. Control of performance by performance control microcomputer 121 Next, the control of performance by performance control microcomputer 121 will be described with reference to Figures 25 to 27. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the following description of the control of performance by performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in performance RAM 124.

[1. Sub-control main processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is powered on, the performance control microcomputer 121 provided on the sub-control board 120 reads out the sub-control main processing program shown in Fig. 25 from the performance ROM 123 and executes it. As shown in the figure, the sub-control main processing first performs power-on processing in response to power-on (S4001). The power-on processing performs, for example, setting of the performance CPU 122, setting of the SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc.

Next, interrupts are prohibited (S4002), and random number update processing is executed (S4003). In the random number update processing (S4003), the values of various effect determination random number counters used to make judgments regarding various effects are updated. As an example, the method for updating the effect determination random number counters for various effects can be the same as the random number update processing performed by the main control board 100 described above. When updating, the random number values may be incremented by 2 rather than by 1. This is also true for the random number update processing performed by the main control board 100 described above.

Once the random number update process is completed, the command transmission process is executed (S4004). In this command transmission process, various commands stored in the output buffer in the effect RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 are sent to the image control board 140. Upon receiving the commands, the image control board 140 displays an image on the display unit 50a (executing various image-based effects) according to the received commands. In addition to the various effects performed by the image control board 140, the sub-control board 120 also outputs audio from the speaker 52 via the audio control circuit 161 (executing various audio-based sound effects), illuminates the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 via the lamp control circuit 151 (executing various light-emitting effects), and activates the movable devices 55, 56, and 58 (executing various movable object effects). In this way, various effects (such as special chart change effects, hold effects, operation effects, pre-reading effects, other preview effects, jackpot game effects, customer waiting effects, and effect mode control) are realized.

The performance control microcomputer 121 then enables interrupts (S4005). Thereafter, steps S4002 to S4005 are looped. While interrupts are enabled, it becomes possible to execute receive interrupt processing (S4010), 1 ms timer interrupt processing (S4011), and 10 ms timer interrupt processing (S4012).

The reception interrupt process (S4010) is executed each time a command sent from the main control board 100 is input to the performance control microcomputer 121. In the reception interrupt process (S4010), the performance control microcomputer 121 stores the various commands sent and received by the output process (S101) of the main control board 100 in the reception buffer of the performance RAM 124. This reception interrupt process is executed with priority over other interrupt processes (S4011, S4012).

[2.1ms timer interrupt processing]
The 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 1 ms period is input to the sub-control board 120. In the 1 ms timer interrupt process (S4011), as shown in Fig. 26, input process (S4101), light emission data output process (S4102), movable device control process (S4103), and watchdog timer process (S4104) are performed in this order.

The input process detects operations on player-operable control elements such as the normal button detection switch 40a and the special button detection switch 41a, and sets commands and creates performance data based on the detection results. The light-emission data output process outputs light-emission data to the lamp control circuit 151 to illuminate lamps such as the frame lamp 53 and the board lamp 54 at timings consistent with image effects, etc., based on the performance data created in the input process and the performance data creation process described below. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 causes the frame lamp 53, the board lamp 54, etc. to emit light in a predetermined light-emission pattern in accordance with the light-emission data. The movable device control process outputs drive data to perform movable object effects that operate movable devices such as movable devices 55, 56, and 58 at predetermined timings based on the performance data created in the input process and the performance data creation process described below. In other words, the performance control microcomputer 121 performs movable object effects that operate movable devices 55, 56, and 58 in a predetermined operating pattern in accordance with the drive data. The watchdog timer process resets the watchdog timer.

[3. 10ms timer interrupt processing]
The 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) is executed each time an interrupt pulse with a 10 ms period is input to the sub-control board 120. As shown in Fig. 27, the 10 ms timer interrupt process (S4012) sequentially performs a received command analysis process (S4201), a performance timer update process (S4202), a sound control process (S4203), and a performance data creation process (S4204).

In the received command analysis process, the command stored in the receive buffer of the performance RAM 124 by the receive interrupt process (S4010) is analyzed, and processing according to the command (for example, selecting a performance, setting a performance mode, setting a command, etc.) is performed. In the performance timer update process, the timer used to measure the time related to each performance is updated. For example, in the performance timer update process, the start and end timings of the effective operation periods of operation parts such as the normal button 40 and special button 41 are measured. In the audio control process, audio data (data that controls the audio output from the speaker 52) is created and output to the audio control circuit 161 based on the results of the input process and received command analysis process. In the performance data creation process, performance data is created based on the results of the received command analysis process.

Here, an example of the processing when the presentation control microcomputer 121 receives a command from the game control microcomputer 101 will be described. The command received by the presentation control microcomputer 121 is a special chart variation start command (special chart 1 variation start command or special chart 2 variation start command). If the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines in the received command analysis process (S4201) that it has received a special chart variation start command, it performs the following processing upon receiving the variation start command: selects a presentation pattern (sub-variation pattern) for the special chart variation presentation based on the special chart variation pattern indicated by the command, sets information for that sub-variation pattern, and sets a variation presentation start command including information for that sub-variation pattern in the output buffer. For example, if the special chart variation pattern indicated by the special chart variation start command is an SP variation (SP jackpot variation or SP miss variation), it selects a sub-variation pattern that will result in an SP reach, and sets a variation presentation start command corresponding to that sub-variation pattern in the output buffer. After that, various processes (command transmission process (S4004), light emission data output process (S4102), movable device control process (S4103), audio control process (S4203), etc.) are executed, thereby realizing a special chart change effect corresponding to the selected sub-change pattern. Note that the process flow for realizing such effects is basically the same for other effects such as jackpot game effects, customer waiting effects, pre-reading effects, and so-called advance notice effects associated with the change.

7. Modifications of the Basic Embodiment Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the basic embodiment will be described. In the description of the modifications, the same components as those of the basic embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components of the modifications may be combined as appropriate.

For example, in the basic embodiment, the variable display of small symbols KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3 is performed in approximate synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols. However, instead of consisting of three symbols like KZ1, KZ2, and KZ3, the small symbols may consist of two or more symbols. For example, two separate symbols, special symbol 1 and special symbol 2, may be provided. Also, one common symbol may be provided for special symbol 1 and special symbol 2. In these cases, the display may be performed on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50, and the control may be performed by the sub-control board 120. An LED device that displays symbols may also be provided in an area other than the play area 6 of the game board 1. In this case, the control of the LED device may be performed by the main control board 100 or the sub-control board 120.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, the special chart 2 determination process is performed with priority, but it may also be configured so that the special chart 1 determination process is performed with priority. Furthermore, the special chart determination process may be performed for the special chart 1 related random numbers and the special chart 2 related random numbers in the order in which they are stored in the reserved memory unit. Furthermore, the specific numerical values shown in the above embodiment are merely examples, and can, of course, be changed as appropriate.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, the variable display of special chart 1 and the variable display of special chart 2 are not performed in parallel, but the configuration may be such that the variable display of special chart 1 and the variable display of special chart 2 are performed in parallel.

In addition, in the basic embodiment, the main control board 100 performs basic control related to the progress of the game, and the sub-control board 120 performs basic control related to the progress of the presentation in response to the progress of the game (game control), so game control and presentation control are performed on different boards, but they may also be configured to be performed on a single board. In this case, the image control board 140 may be included in that single board, or may be provided separately from that single board.

8. First Embodiment Next, a first embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the basic embodiment described above is also applied to the first embodiment.

8-1. Main Games in the Gaming Machine The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment determines whether or not a jackpot has occurred by judging the special symbol random number obtained based on winnings in the first starting slot 11 and the second starting slot 12 according to the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 28(A). Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the type of jackpot symbol (jackpot symbol type) according to the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 28(B). For example, in this embodiment, the allocation rate of the jackpot symbol type determined by the jackpot symbol type determination for special symbol 1 is 50% for "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol A" and 50% for "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol B." Furthermore, the allocation rate of the jackpot symbol type determined by the jackpot symbol type determination for special symbol 2 is 90% for "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C" and 10% for "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D."

Furthermore, if the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines that a jackpot has not been won (i.e., that a loss has been determined), it determines the type of losing symbol by judging the jackpot symbol type random number in accordance with the losing symbol type determination table shown in Figure 28 (C). For example, in this embodiment, the allocation rate for the special symbol 1 lottery is 50% for "Special symbol 1_losing symbol A" and 50% for "Special symbol 1_losing symbol B." Furthermore, the allocation rate for the special symbol 2 lottery is 100% for "Special symbol 2_losing symbol C." Differences in the type of losing symbol can affect the settings related to the game state after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed. This point will be discussed later.

In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination is a miss, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines whether or not to generate a reach in the special chart variation presentation, in accordance with a reach determination table such as that shown in Figure 28 (D).

Next, the types of jackpots and losses will be explained in detail with reference to Figures 29 and 30. As mentioned above, the results of the special symbol lottery (special symbol 1 lottery and special symbol 2 lottery) can be either a "jackpot" or a "loss." In the event of a "jackpot," a "jackpot symbol" is displayed frozen on the special symbol display 81. Jackpot symbols include "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol A," "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol B," "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C," and "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D." In the event of a "loss," a "loss symbol" is displayed frozen on the special symbol display 81. Losing symbols include "Special symbol 1_loss symbol A," "Special symbol 1_loss symbol B," and "Special symbol 2_loss symbol C."

If a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, a "jackpot game" is executed in which the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 14, second jackpot opening 15) are opened in an opening pattern corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that is stopped and displayed. In this form, the jackpot game includes multiple rounds of play (unit opening games), an opening (also referred to as OP) before the first round of play begins, and an ending (also referred to as ED) after the final round of play ends. Each round of play begins with the end of the OP or the end of the previous round of play, and ends with the start of the next round of play or the start of the ED. The time (interval time) during which the jackpot opening is closed between rounds of play is included in the open round of play before that closure.

If a jackpot is won as a result of the special symbol lottery, a jackpot game is executed, which opens the jackpot slots (first jackpot slot 14, second jackpot slot 15). In this version, as shown in FIG. 29, there are two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a) that can be won in the lottery for the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and two types of jackpot symbols (jackpot symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display 81b) that can be won in the lottery for the second special symbol (special symbol 2). Specifically, in the lottery for special symbol 1, there is a possibility of winning "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol A" or "Special symbol 1_jackpot symbol B." In addition, in the lottery for special symbol 2, there is a possibility of winning "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol C" or "Special symbol 2_jackpot symbol D."

There are multiple types of jackpots. In this embodiment, there are two types of jackpots: a V-long jackpot and a V-short jackpot, as shown in Figure 29. A "V-long jackpot" is a jackpot in which, during a jackpot game, the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a first opening pattern (V-long opening pattern) that makes it easy for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 16 (hereinafter also referred to as "V passage"). A "V-short jackpot" is a jackpot in which the VAT opening/closing member 15k and the distribution member 16k operate in a second opening pattern (V-short opening pattern) that makes it difficult or impossible for the gaming ball to pass through the specific area 16.

As shown in Figure 29, "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol A" and "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol C" are V-long jackpots. If a V-long jackpot is won and a V passes during jackpot play, the game state after the jackpot play is a "high probability, high base game state," which is a high probability state and time-saving state A. In the high probability state and time-saving state A based on a V-long jackpot, the number of time-saving times is set to 100. In this form, in the high probability state and time-saving state A based on a V-long jackpot, the number of chance modes and the number of time-saving times are the same. In other words, in the high probability state and time-saving state A based on a V-long jackpot, the number of chance modes is set to 100.

Furthermore, "Special Chart 1_Jackpot Symbol B" and "Special Chart 2_Jackpot Symbol D" are V-short jackpots. When a V-short jackpot is won, if the V does not pass during the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game is the normal probability state, which is a "low probability high base game state," and time-saving state A. In time-saving state A based on a V-short jackpot, the number of time-saving times is set to 100.

Furthermore, if the result of the special pattern lottery is determined to be a loss, the type of losing pattern will be determined. As shown in Figure 30, there are two types of losing patterns determined in the special pattern 1 lottery (losing patterns stopped and displayed on the special pattern 1 display 81a), and there is only one type of losing pattern determined in the special pattern 2 lottery (losing patterns stopped and displayed on the special pattern 2 display 81b). Specifically, in the special pattern 1 lottery, either "Special pattern 1_losing pattern A" or "Special pattern 1_losing pattern B" is determined. In addition, in the special pattern 2 lottery, "Special pattern 2_losing pattern C" is determined.

As shown in Figure 30, "Special symbol 1_losing symbol A" and "Special symbol 1_losing symbol B" are special misses, while "Special symbol 2_losing symbol C" is a normal miss. A special miss is a miss that can trigger control of the time-saving state, as described below. In other words, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a special miss, the game control microcomputer 101 may control the game state after the missing symbol is stopped and displayed to a time-saving state. For this reason, special misses are also sometimes referred to as time-saving misses. Time-saving misses include normal time-saving misses and slight time-saving misses. If the result of the special symbol lottery is a normal time-saving miss, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state after the losing symbol is stopped and displayed to a normal time-saving state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the normal time-saving state). If the result of the special symbol lottery is a slight time-saving miss, the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game state after the stop display of the missing symbol to a time-saving state (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a slight time-saving state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 12 than in the normal time-saving state. "Special symbol 1_missing symbol A" is a normal time-saving miss, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Special symbol 1_missing symbol A," the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to time-saving state C, which is one of the normal time-saving states. For time-saving state C based on "Special symbol 1_missing symbol A," the game control microcomputer 101 sets the number of time-saving times to 100. "Special symbol 1_missing symbol B" is a slight time-saving miss, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is "Special symbol 1_missing symbol B," the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to enter time-saving state CL, which is one of the slight time-saving states. For time-saving state CL based on "Special symbol 1_missing symbol B," the game control microcomputer 101 sets the number of time-saving operations to 10,000.

Here, we will explain the time-saving state of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 has a non-time-saving state and a time-saving state. The non-time-saving state is also referred to as the normal gaming state. The initial gaming state after powering on the pachinko gaming machine PY1, such as when playing for the first time, is the non-time-saving state (normal gaming state). The time-saving state is a gaming state in which the second starting hole 12 is in a ball-entering state more frequently per unit time than in the non-time-saving state. Therefore, in the time-saving state, it may be easier for a gaming ball to enter the electric chute 12D than in the non-time-saving state. A time-saving state in which a gaming ball is more likely to enter the second starting hole 12 than in the non-time-saving state may be a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, the more time-saving times set for the time-saving state, the longer that gaming state will continue. For this reason, the more times the time-saving feature is set, the more advantageous the game state may be for the player.

Next, we will explain the time-saving state in more detail. As shown in Figure 31 (A), the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery (the probability of being determined as a win) is the same in both the time-saving state (time-saving state A, time-saving state C, time-saving state CL) and the non-time-saving state. Specifically, in this mode, the normal symbol lottery is almost always determined as a win.

In the time-saving state, as shown in Figure 31 (B), the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the normal symbol fluctuation time is 60 seconds in the non-time-saving state, but is shorter in the time-saving state. In other words, in the time-saving state, the fluctuation time shortening function of the normal symbol display 82 is activated. Furthermore, the normal symbol fluctuation time is shorter in time-saving states A and C than in time-saving state CL.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, as shown in Figure 31 (C), the open time of the electric chute 12D during auxiliary play may be longer than in the non-time-saving state. In this embodiment, the open time of the electric chute 12D is 0.1 seconds per time in the non-time-saving state. In the time-saving state CL, it is the same as in the non-time-saving state, but is longer in the time-saving states A and C. In other words, in the time-saving states A and C, the open time extension function of the electric chute 12D is activated.

Furthermore, in the time-saving state, as shown in Figure 31 (C), the number of times the electric chute 12D opens during auxiliary play may be greater than in the non-time-saving state. In this mode, the electric chute 12D opens once in the non-time-saving state, and twice in time-saving states A, C, and CL. In other words, in the time-saving state, the function to increase the number of times the electric chute 12D opens is activated.

When the function to shorten the variable time of the normal display 82, the function to extend the opening time of the electric chute 12D, or the function to increase the number of times the electric chute 12D opens are activated, the electric chute 12D opens more frequently than when these functions are not activated, and game balls tend to enter the second starting hole 12 more frequently. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of winning balls to the number of shot balls, can become higher.

In this embodiment, time-saving states A and C, which are normal time-saving states, are high base states, and the non-time-saving state is a low base state. On the other hand, in time-saving state CL, which is a slight time-saving state, the second starting hole 12 is in a ball-scoring state more frequently per unit time than in the non-time-saving state, but the opening time is short, so in reality, a ball entering the second starting hole 12 is almost impossible. Time-saving states A and C, which are high base states, are equivalent to an "easy-to-enter-ball state" in which the second starting hole 12 is in a ball-scoring state more frequently than in the non-time-saving state, making it easier for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 12 than in the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, time-saving state CL is equivalent to a "non-easy-to-enter-ball state" in which the second starting hole 12 is in a ball-scoring state less frequently than in the normal time-saving state, making it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second starting hole 12 than in the easy-to-enter-ball state. In other words, the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state are equivalent to "non-easy-to-enter-ball states."

The time-saving state does not necessarily require all of the above functions to be activated. That is, it is sufficient that the activation of one or more of the probability fluctuation function, the function shortening the fluctuation time of the map display 82, the function extending the opening time of the electric chute 12D, and the function increasing the number of times the electric chute 12D is opened makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting hole 12 associated with the electric chute 12D than when that function is not activated. In other words, for example, the probability fluctuation function of the map display 82 may or may not be activated.

The time-saving state may end when the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined maximum number of times (time-saving count). Furthermore, the time-saving state may end when a jackpot is won and the jackpot game is executed. The maximum number of times (time-saving count) can be determined based on the control trigger for the time-saving state (type of special symbol) (see Figures 29 and 30). The maximum number of times (time-saving count) for time-saving states A and C (normal time-saving state) is sometimes referred to as the normal time-saving count, and the maximum number of times (time-saving count) for the minute time-saving state is sometimes referred to as the minute time-saving count. In this form, control is exercised in time-saving state A after a jackpot game. Furthermore, control may be exercised in time-saving state C or time-saving state CL depending on the result of the special symbol lottery that a jackpot game will not be executed (special miss).

It is also possible to provide multiple time-saving states with different functions, such as shortening the variable time of the normal display 82, extending the opening time of the electric chute 12D, or increasing the number of times the electric chute 12D is opened. In other words, it is possible to provide multiple time-saving states with different degrees of ease of a game ball entering the second starting hole 12. Which of the multiple time-saving states is controlled to may be determined by the special symbol that triggers the control of the time-saving state, the game state at the time the special symbol is drawn, etc.

In time-saving states A and C (normal time-saving states), which are states where ball entry is easy, it is more advantageous to play by hitting the ball to the right to enter the right play area 6B (see Figure 2). This is because the electric chute 12D is more likely to open than in the "non-easy ball entry state," making it easier to win at the second start hole 12. For this reason, you hit the ball to the right to have the ball enter the second start hole 12 while passing it through gate 13, which triggers the normal symbol lottery. This allows you to get more start wins (wins at the start hole) than by hitting the ball to the left.

In contrast, in the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) and non-time-saving state, which are states where it is not easy to score a ball, it is difficult to score a ball in the second starting hole 12. For this reason, you can progress in the game to an advantage by shooting the game ball with the aim of scoring a ball in the first starting hole 11. This is because you can get multiple starting wins. When playing with the aim of scoring a ball in the first starting hole 11, you hit the game ball with the left hand to enter the left playing area 6A.

Next, we will explain how the special symbol variation pattern (special symbol variation pattern) is determined. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 determines the special symbol variation pattern according to different special symbol variation pattern determination tables for the non-time-saving state, time-saving state A (normal time-saving state), time-saving state C (normal time-saving state), and time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) (see Figures 32, 33, 34, and 35). The special symbol variation pattern determination tables for time-saving states A and C (Figures 33 and 34) are tables that more easily select variation patterns with shorter variation times than the special symbol variation pattern determination tables for the non-time-saving state and time-saving state CL (Figures 32 and 35).

8-2. About the Start Winning Command The pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment can execute a so-called pre-reading effect. The pre-reading effect is an effect that uses a start winning command specified based on the determination information (random number value such as a special symbol random number) acquired by the start winning, and suggests the probability of winning (the likelihood of winning a jackpot) for the start winning before the win/loss determination immediately before the start of the special symbol variation (variable display of the special symbol) based on the start winning.

As shown in Figure 36, the start winning command generated in this embodiment includes lottery result information indicating whether the result is a jackpot, a normal miss, or a special miss. If the result is a special miss, it also includes information on whether the result will subsequently trigger control to either time-saving state C or time-saving state CL. The start winning command in this embodiment also includes start port information indicating whether the result was won in the first start port 11 or the second start port 12. Note that the start winning command only needs to include lottery result information, and the information included in the start winning command in addition to the lottery result information can be changed as appropriate.

8-3. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 101 Next, the operation of the game control microcomputer 101 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Power-On Processing] The gaming control microcomputer 101 is capable of executing the power-on processing (S001). Note that the power-on processing (S001) is executed only once after power is turned on and is not executed thereafter. As shown in FIG. 37, the power-on processing (S001) first sets permission for access to the gaming RAM 104 (S011). This makes it possible to write and read information to and from the gaming RAM 104. Next, the gaming control microcomputer 101 determines whether the RAM clear switch 119 has been operated (whether it is ON or not) (S012). If the RAM clear switch 119 is ON (YES in S012), the process proceeds to step S018. On the other hand, if it is not ON (NO in S012), the process then determines whether the power-off flag is ON (S013). The power-off flag is a flag that is set ON when a power outage occurs.

If the power-off flag is not ON (NO in S013), it is possible that the power was not shut off properly, so proceed to step S018. On the other hand, if the power-off flag is ON (YES in S013), a checksum is calculated (S014) and compared with the checksum calculated at the time of power outage (S015). If the checksum values do not match (NO in S015), the contents stored in the gaming RAM 104 are not normal, so proceed to step S018. On the other hand, if the checksum values match (YES in S015), it is determined that the contents stored in the gaming RAM 104 are normal, and proceed to step S016.

In step S016, a process for setting the working area of the gaming RAM 104 when power is restored is performed. In this setting process, power restoration information is read from the gaming ROM 103, and this power restoration information is set in the working area of the gaming RAM 104. The gaming control microcomputer 101 then turns off the power-off flag (S017) and proceeds to step S022.

In addition, in step S018, all game information stored in the game RAM 104 is cleared (S018). Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 101 performs initial settings on the work area of the game RAM 104 (S019). In this initial setting process, the initial setting information read from the game ROM 103 is set in the work area of the game RAM 104. In addition, the RAM clear flag is turned ON (S020). The RAM clear flag is a flag indicating that a RAM clear has been performed. After being turned ON, the RAM clear flag is turned OFF in response to the first jackpot game being played. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 outputs a RAM clear notification command to the sub-control board 120 to notify that a RAM clear has been performed (S021). Then, the process proceeds to step S022. In step S022, other initial settings are performed, such as setting the game CPU 102, the SIO, PIO, and CTC (a circuit for managing interrupt time).

[Sensor detection processing] The game control microcomputer 101 can execute the sensor detection processing (S104) during the main timer interrupt processing (S005). As shown in FIG. 38, in the sensor detection processing (S104), the game control microcomputer 101 first determines whether or not a game ball has passed through the gate 13, i.e., whether or not a game ball has been detected by the gate sensor 13a (S201). If the game ball has passed through the gate 13 (YES in S201), the gate passing processing (S202), described below, is performed. On the other hand, if the game ball has not passed through the gate 13 (NO in S201), the gate passing processing (S202) is skipped and the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 12, i.e., whether a gaming ball has been detected by the second starting hole sensor 12a (S203). If a gaming ball has not entered the second starting hole 12 (NO in S203), the process proceeds to step S209. However, if a gaming ball has entered the second starting hole 12 (YES in S203), it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 (specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of reserved special symbols 2 provided in the gaming RAM 104) has reached "4" (S204). If the number of reserved special symbols 2 has reached "4" (YES in S204), the process ends. However, if the number of reserved special symbols 2 is less than "4" (NO in S204), "1" is added to the number of reserved special symbols 2 (S205).

Next, the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S206) is performed. In the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S206), the special symbol random number counter value, the jackpot symbol type random number counter value, the reach random number counter value, and the special symbol variation pattern random number counter value are acquired (i.e., the random number group shown in Figure 8 (A) is acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in a memory area of the special symbol 2 reserved memory unit 105b (Figure 6) that corresponds to the current number of special symbol 2 reserved.

Next, the second start winning command identification process (S207) is performed. In the second start winning command identification process (S207), the second start winning command (an example of winning information) is identified using the start winning command identification table shown in Figure 36 based on the random number group stored in step S206. Specifically, for example, in the normal probability state, if the special pattern random number is "61248" and the jackpot pattern type random number is "199," the second start winning command "E2H03H" is identified by referencing the location of the second start slot 12 in the start winning command identification table shown in Figure 36. The command consists of two bytes of information (a one-byte upper command (e.g., E2H) and a one-byte lower command (e.g., 03H)). In this form of start winning command, the value of the upper digit of the two-digit upper command in hexadecimal is information that specifies the type of command (that it is a start winning command). Additionally, the value of the last digit of the upper command is start port information that specifies the type of start port (whether winning the first start port 11 or the second start port 12). Additionally, the lower command, which is a two-digit hexadecimal number, is lottery result information. Note that these rules regarding start winning commands are just an example and can be changed as desired.

The game control microcomputer 101 then sets the second start winning command identified in step S207 in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S208).

Next, in the sensor detection process (S104), it is determined whether a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 11, i.e., whether a gaming ball has been detected by the first starting hole sensor 11a (S209). If a gaming ball has not entered the first starting hole 11 (NO in S209), the process ends. However, if a gaming ball has entered the first starting hole 11 (YES in S209), it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 (specifically, the value of the counter that counts the number of reserved special symbols 1 provided in the gaming RAM 104) has reached "4" (S210). If the number of reserved special symbols 1 has reached "4" (YES in S210), the process ends. However, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is less than "4" (NO in S210), "1" is added to the number of reserved special symbols 1 (S211).

Next, the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S212) is performed. In the special symbol 1 related random number acquisition process (S212), similar to the special symbol 2 related random number acquisition process (S206), the special symbol random number counter value, jackpot symbol type random number counter value, reach random number counter value, and special symbol variation pattern random number counter value are acquired (i.e., the random number group shown in Figure 8 (A) is acquired), and these acquired random number values are stored in a memory area of the special symbol 1 reserved memory unit 105a (Figure 6) that corresponds to the current number of special symbol 1 reserved.

Next, the first start winning command identification process (S213) is performed. In the first start winning command identification process (S213), the first start winning command (an example of winning information) is identified using the start winning command identification table shown in Figure 36 based on the random number group stored in step S212. Specifically, if the special pattern random number is "65535" and the jackpot pattern type random number is "199", the first start slot 11 in the start winning command identification table in Figure 36 is referenced, and the command "E1H04H" is identified as the first start winning command. The identified first start winning command includes lottery result information.

The game control microcomputer 101 then sets the first start winning command identified in step S213 in the output buffer of the game RAM 104 (S214), and ends the process. In this embodiment, if a first start winning command indicating a normal time-saving miss is output to the sub-control board 120, the presentation control microcomputer 121 can execute a presentation suggesting a transition to a time-saving state (for example, a presentation in which a predetermined image suggesting a transition to a time-saving state is displayed on the display unit 50a) as a pre-reading presentation.

[Gate Passing Processing] As shown in Figure 39, the gate passing processing (S202) first determines whether or not the normal symbol is waiting to change (S221). Waiting for the normal symbol to change means that neither the normal symbol change display nor the auxiliary game is being played. If the normal symbol is not waiting to change (NO in S221), this processing is immediately terminated, but if the normal symbol is waiting to change (YES in S221), the normal symbol random number acquisition processing (S222) is performed. In the normal symbol random number acquisition processing (S222), the normal symbol random number counter value (Figure 8 (B)) is acquired, and the acquired random number value is stored in a specified memory area of the gaming RAM 104.

[Special Operation Processing] The game control microcomputer 101 can execute special operation processing (S106) during the main timer interrupt processing (S005). As shown in Figure 40, during special operation processing (S106), the game control microcomputer 101 first divides the processing related to the special chart display 81 and the large prize device (first large prize device 14D, second large prize device 15D) into four stages, and assigns "special operation status 1, 2, 3, 4" to each of these stages. If the "special operation status" is "1" (YES in S901), special symbol standby processing (S902) is performed; if the "special operation status" is "2" (NO in S901, YES in S903), special symbol changing processing (S904) is performed; if the "special operation status" is "3" (NO in both S901 and S903, YES in S905), special symbol determination processing (S906) is performed; and if the "special operation status" is "4" (NO in S901, S903, and S905), special electric device processing (S908) is performed as a jackpot game. The special operation status is initially set to "1".

[Special Symbol Waiting Process] As shown in FIG. 41, in the special symbol waiting process (S902), first, it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols 2 is "0" (S1001). If the number of reserved special symbols 2 is "0" (YES in S1001), i.e., if there is no memory of a random number counter value group acquired as a result of winning at the second starting gate 12, it is determined whether the number of reserved special symbols 1 is "0" (S1007). If the number of reserved special symbols 1 is also "0" (YES in S1007), i.e., if there is no memory of a random number counter value group acquired as a result of winning at the first starting gate 11, it is determined whether the display unit 50a of the image display device 50 has already been set to the waiting screen (demo screen for waiting customers) (S1013). If so (YES in S1013), the process ends; if not (NO in S1013), the waiting screen setting process (S1014) is performed. The standby screen setting process (S1014) waits for a specified standby time to elapse, and then sets a customer standby command to display the standby screen.

If the number of reserved special symbols 2 is not "0" in step S1001 (NO in S1001), that is, if there is one or more stored random number counter values (reserved special symbol 2 information) obtained as a result of winning at the second starting port 12, the game control microcomputer 101 performs the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003), which will be described later. The game control microcomputer 101 then decrements the number of reserved special symbols 2 by 1 (S1004). The storage location (memory area) for various counter values in the special symbol 2 reservation memory unit 105b is then shifted one position from the current position toward the side from which the symbol is to be read, and the memory area corresponding to the fourth reserved symbol in the special symbol 2 reservation memory unit 105b (the memory area farthest from the side from which the symbol is to be read) is cleared (S1005). In this way, the reserved second special symbols are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1006). In the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1006), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, thereby starting the variable display of the second special symbol. The variation start command (also called the special symbol 2 variation start command) set in the special symbol 2 variation start process (S1006) includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and information on the variation pattern set in the special symbol 2 variation pattern selection process (S1003) (information including variation time information).

Also, if the number of reserved special charts 2 is "0" but the number of reserved special charts 1 is not "0" (YES in S1001 and NO in S1007), that is, if there is no memory of a group of random number counter values obtained as a result of winning at the second starting port 12 but there is one or more memory of a group of random number counter values obtained as a result of winning at the first starting port 11 (reserved information for special chart 1), the special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) and special chart 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009) described below are performed. The game control microcomputer 101 then decrements the number of reserved special charts 1 by 1 (S1010). Then, the storage location (memory area) of various counter values in the special chart 1 reserve memory unit 105a is shifted by one from the current position toward the side from which it is read, and the memory area corresponding to the fourth reserved special chart 1 in the special chart 1 reserve memory unit 105a (the memory area farthest from the side from which it is read) is cleared (S1011). In this way, the first special symbol reserves are consumed in the order in which they were reserved. Next, the game control microcomputer 101 executes the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1012). In the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1012), the special operation status is set to "2" and a variation start command is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104, thereby starting the display of the first special symbol variation. The variation start command (also referred to as the special symbol 1 variation start command) set in the special symbol 1 variation start process (S1012) includes information on the special symbol stop symbol data set in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) and information on the variation pattern set in the special symbol 1 variation pattern selection process (S1009) (information including variation time information).

As mentioned above, in this mode, the display of the special pattern changes based on the reserved first special pattern is only performed if there are no acquired random numbers related to special pattern 2 (YES in S1001). In other words, the drawing for special pattern 2 is performed before the drawing for special pattern 1.

[Special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (special symbol 1 jackpot determination process)] The special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) and the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together based on Figure 42. As shown in Figure 42, in the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008), the special symbol random number counter value is first read as the determination value (S1101). In detail, in the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002), the special symbol random number counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserve memory section 105b of the gaming RAM 104 (more specifically, the memory area corresponding to the first of the second special symbol reserves) is read. Additionally, in the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008), the special symbol random number counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved memory unit 105a of the gaming RAM 104 (more specifically, the memory area corresponding to the first reserved special symbol) is read.

Next, the jackpot determination table (Fig. 28(A)) is set (S1105), and it is determined whether or not a jackpot has occurred based on the set jackpot determination table (S1106). If the result of the jackpot determination (S1106) is a "jackpot," the jackpot flag is turned ON (S1107), and the jackpot symbol type random number counter value is read, and the jackpot symbol type (type of jackpot) is determined based on the jackpot symbol type determination table shown in Fig. 28(B) (S1108). After the jackpot symbol type is determined (S1108), the special symbol stop symbol data (see Fig. 28(B)) corresponding to the jackpot symbol type is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in the gaming RAM 104 (S1109), and the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is not a jackpot (NO in S1106), it is a "miss," so the jackpot symbol type random number counter value is read and the type of miss symbol (type of miss) is determined based on the miss symbol type determination table shown in FIG. 28 (C) (S1111). After determining the type of miss symbol (S1111), it is determined whether the type of miss symbol is a special miss (normal time-saving miss or slight time-saving miss) (S1112). If it is a special miss (YES in S1112), after processing step S1113, special symbol stop symbol data corresponding to the type of miss symbol (see FIG. 28 (C)) is set in the special symbol type buffer provided in gaming RAM 104 (S1114), and processing ends.

In step S1113, the number of time-saving times corresponding to the game state and the type of losing symbol is obtained based on the losing symbol type determination table (Figure 30), and the obtained number of time-saving times is set in a predetermined time-saving number memory area provided in the game RAM 104. Specifically, for example, if the game is in a non-time-saving state and the type of losing symbol is losing symbol A, the losing symbol type determination table (Figure 30) is referenced and the number of time-saving times "100" is set in the game RAM 104.

[Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process)] The Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1003) and the Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1009) have the same processing flow, so they will be explained together based on Figure 43. As shown in Figure 43, the Special Chart 2 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1003) or the Special Chart 1 Variation Pattern Selection Process (S1009) first determines whether the game state is time-saving state A (S1301).

If the time-saving state is A (YES in S1301), it is then determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1302). If it is ON (YES in S1302), the table for jackpots in time-saving state A (the portion of the table shown in Figure 33 that corresponds to the jackpot) is referenced, and a special chart fluctuation pattern is selected based on the value of the special chart fluctuation pattern random number counter (S1303). As shown in Figure 33, once the special chart fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined.

In the case of a jackpot, a special chart variation pattern is associated with a variation effect, and once the special chart variation pattern is determined, a variation effect corresponding to that special chart variation pattern is executed. Specifically, for example, an SP reach is executed in a variation effect based on special chart variation pattern P21, and a normal reach is executed in a variation effect based on special chart variation pattern P22 (see the notes section of the table in Figure 33). Here, an SP reach (super reach) is a reach with a longer variation time after the reach than a normal reach, and the allocation rate of the table is set so that the probability of winning (the likelihood of winning the jackpot) is higher than that of a normal reach. In this form, a super reach is executed in a progressive manner via a normal reach.

Also, in step S1302, if the jackpot flag is not ON (NO in S1302), the table for misses during time-saving state A (the portion of the table shown in Figure 33 that corresponds to misses) is referenced, and a special chart change pattern is selected based on the special chart change pattern random number counter value (S1304). In other words, a special chart change pattern corresponding to a missing symbol is selected. Note that when selecting a special chart change pattern for a missing symbol, the presence or absence of a reach (the reach random number counter value (whether or not a reach establishment random number value)) is also referenced.

Furthermore, in step S1301, if it is determined that the time-saving state is not A (NO in S1301), it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is C (S1305). If it is C (YES in S1305), a special chart fluctuation pattern is selected according to the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for time-saving state C shown in Figure 34 (S1306 to S1308). If it is neither A nor C (NO in both S1301 and S1305), it is determined whether or not the time-saving state is CL (S1309). If it is CL (YES in S1309), a special chart fluctuation pattern is selected according to the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for CL time-saving state shown in Figure 35 (B) (S1310 to S1312). If the game is not in time-saving state A, time-saving state C, or time-saving state CL (NO in S1301, S1305, and S1309), that is, if the game is not in time-saving state, a special chart fluctuation pattern is selected according to the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for non-time-saving states shown in Figure 32 (S1313 to S1315). When selecting a special chart fluctuation pattern in time-saving state C, time-saving state CL, or non-time-saving state, processing is performed in the same manner as time-saving state A, except that the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table to be referenced is set to a table that corresponds to the game state.

After selecting the special symbol variation pattern as described above, the selected special symbol variation pattern is set (S1316) and this process ends. Information about the special symbol variation pattern set in step S1316 is included in the variation start command set in step S1006 or S1012 in the special symbol standby process (S902).

[Special Symbol Fluctuating Process] As shown in Figure 44, the special symbol fluctuating process (S904) first determines whether the special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuating time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in step S1003 or S1009; see Figures 32, 33, 34, and 35) has elapsed (S1501). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1501), this process immediately ends. This allows the display of the fluctuating special symbol to continue.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time has elapsed (YES in S1501), a fluctuation stop command is set (S1502), and the special operation status is set to "3" (S1503). Next, the game status management process at the end of special symbol fluctuation (S1504), described below, is performed, and then other processes are performed (S1505), such as stopping the special symbol fluctuation display at the symbol (jackpot symbol, losing symbol) corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data (see Figures 28 (B) and (C)), before this process ends.

[Game Status Management Process at End of Special Symbol Variation] As shown in FIG. 45, the game status management process at end of special symbol variation (S1504) first determines whether the high probability variable flag is ON (S1511). If the high probability variable flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1516. If the high probability variable flag is ON, the value of the high probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (S1513), and a determination is made as to whether the value of the high probability variable counter is "0" (S1514). If the value of the high probability variable counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S1516. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1514), the high probability variable flag is turned OFF (S1515) to end the high probability state, and the process proceeds to step S1516.

In step S1516, it is determined whether the time-saving flag is ON. If the time-saving flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1523. If the time-saving flag is ON, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (S1517), and it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1518). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S1523. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1518), the time-saving flag is turned OFF to end the time-saving state (S1519), and the process proceeds to step S1523.

Here, the probability change counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of times a high probability state is initiated (probability change count) at the start of a high probability state, and is decremented according to the display of changing special symbols during the high probability state. Furthermore, the time-saving counter is set to a value corresponding to the number of time-saving states initiated at the start of a time-saving state, and is decremented according to the display of changing special symbols during the time-saving state. Note that it is possible to provide as many time-saving counters and time-saving flags as there are types of time-saving states.

In step S1523, the game control microcomputer 101 performs a game status flag update process. In the game status flag update process, the value of the game status flag is set to a value corresponding to the current game status. As shown in the table in Figure 45, for example, the value of the game status flag is set to "1" if the game is in a low probability state (normal probability state) and not in a time-saving state, and is set to "6" if the game is in a high probability state and in time-saving state A. In the game status flag update process (S1523), a game status designation command containing information about the updated game status flag (i.e., information about the current game status) is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. By outputting this command, the sub-control board 120 is notified of information about the current game status. The sub-control board 120 then controls the presentation mode according to the current game status.

In this embodiment, the game state management process (S1504) at the end of the special symbol variation controls the state from a high probability state to a low probability state when the number of special symbol variations reaches the upper limit of the number of chance variations. This control from a high probability state to a low probability state when the number of special symbol variations reaches the upper limit of the number of chance variations is performed at the last special symbol variation in the high probability state. In other words, at the last symbol variation in the high probability state, the special symbol variation ends and the special symbol stops, transitioning to a low probability state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the game state management process (S1504) at the end of special symbol variation controls the game from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the number of special symbol variations reaches the upper limit of the number of time-saving variations. This control from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the number of special symbol variations reaches the upper limit of the number of time-saving variations is performed at the last special symbol variation in the time-saving state. In other words, at the last symbol variation in the time-saving state, the game transitions to the non-time-saving state when the special symbol variation ends and the special symbol stops.

[Special Symbol Determination Processing] As shown in Figure 46, the special symbol determination processing (S906) first determines whether the special symbol stop time (see Figures 32, 33, 34, and 35) has elapsed (S1601). If it has not elapsed (NO in S1601), this processing immediately ends. On the other hand, if the stop time has elapsed (YES in S1601), the game status management processing when the special symbol is determined, described below, is performed (S1602).

Next, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON (S1603). If the jackpot flag is ON (YES in S1603), the special action status is set to "4" (S1604). Next, the game control microcomputer 101 resets the game state (S1606). Specifically, if the probability variable flag is ON, it is set to OFF, and if the time-saving flag is ON, it is set to OFF. In other words, during the jackpot game, the game is controlled to the normal probability state and non-time-saving state.

After that, to start the jackpot game, a jackpot opening command (see FIG. 29) is set (S1607), and the opening of the jackpot game begins (S1608). Following step S1608, the game control microcomputer 101 sets an opening pattern (see FIG. 29 for details) corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that has been won (S1609). At this time, the value of the jackpot opening counter, which counts the number of times the jackpot opening has been opened during the special game, is set to a value corresponding to the type of jackpot symbol that has been won. Note that the setting of the opening pattern (setting of data corresponding to the opening pattern) may be performed for each round.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not ON in step S1603 (NO in S1603), the jackpot game will not start, so the special action status is set to "1" (S1619) and this process ends.

[Game Status Management Process When Special Symbol is Confirmed] As shown in FIG. 47, the game status management process when a special symbol is confirmed (S1602) first determines whether the probability variable flag is OFF (S1701). If the probability variable flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S1710. If the probability variable flag is OFF, the process then determines whether the time-saving flag is OFF (S1702). If the time-saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S1710. If the time-saving flag is OFF, the process then determines whether the type of missing symbol is a special miss (normal time-saving miss or slight time-saving miss) (S1703). If it is not a special miss (NO in S1703), the process proceeds to step S1710. If it is a special miss (YES in S1703), the process then sets the time-saving flag ON (S1704). This determines whether to enter the time-saving state (time-saving determination) in response to the special miss. That is, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is set in response to the special miss being displayed in a non-time-saving state. A predetermined number of time-saving periods corresponding to the special miss symbol is set in the time-saving counter (S1705), and the process proceeds to step S1710. The number of time-saving periods set here is the number of time-saving periods stored in the time-saving period storage area of the gaming RAM 104 in step S1113 of the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008). The time-saving state and the number of time-saving periods set in this process correspond not to the game state (time-saving state, non-time-saving state) at the time the process is performed, but to the game state at the time the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) is performed.

Furthermore, by executing steps S1704 and S1705, the game state is controlled to a time-shortened state. The time-shortened state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the special symbol changes a predetermined maximum number of times (time-shortened count), or the next jackpot game is executed. In this way, in this form, the game may be controlled to the time-shortened state even when there is a loss. Note that in this form, control to the time-shortened state based on a loss is limited to when the game is in a low-probability state and not in a time-shortened state (when both steps S1701 and S1702 are YES).

In addition, in step S1710, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game status flag update processing. The game status flag update processing (S1710) of the game status management processing (S1602) when a special symbol is determined can be performed in the same manner as the game status flag update processing (S1523) of the game status management processing (S1504) when a special symbol variation ends.

In this embodiment, the game state management process (S1602) when the special symbol is confirmed controls the game to a time-saving state based on a special miss. The time-saving state based on a special miss is set when the probability variable flag is OFF and the time-saving flag is OFF, but is not set when at least one of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag is ON. In other words, when the game is already in a high probability state or a time-saving state, the game is not controlled to a time-saving state based on a special miss. However, in this embodiment, the game state management process (S1504) when the special symbol variation ends can be executed before the game state management process (S1602) when the special symbol is confirmed. For this reason, among the symbol changes that begin when at least one of a high-probability state and a time-saving state is set, in the final symbol change (a symbol change that reaches the upper limit of executions of a specific game state when at least one of a high-probability state and a time-saving state is set), the game state is set to a non-time-saving state (probability variable flag, time-saving flag OFF) before the game state management process (S1602) when a special symbol is confirmed. In other words, in the final symbol change in a high-probability state, a time-saving determination is made in a low-probability state. Also, in the final symbol change in a time-saving state, a time-saving determination is made in a non-time-saving state. For this reason, control to the time-saving state may occur based on a special miss.

[Special Electric Device Processing (Jackpot Game)] Special electric device processing is processing for executing a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 48, the special electric device processing (S908) first determines whether the jackpot end flag is ON (S2001). The jackpot end flag is a flag that indicates that all of the jackpot devices (first jackpot device 14D, second jackpot device 15D) have been opened during the jackpot game currently being played.

If the jackpot end flag is not ON (NO in S2001), it is determined whether the large prize opening (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) is currently open (i.e., whether the first large prize device 14D or the second large prize device 15D is currently open) (S2002). If it is not currently open (NO in S2002), it is determined whether the time has come to open the large prize opening, i.e., whether the jackpot opening time has passed and it is time to start opening the first large prize opening 14, or whether the interval time between openings has passed and it is time to start the next opening (S2003).

If the determination result in step S2003 is NO, processing ends as is. On the other hand, if the determination result in step S2003 is YES, it is determined whether the currently executing jackpot game is a jackpot game based on a V-long jackpot (see FIG. 29) (S2004). If it is not a V-long jackpot (NO in S2004), the process proceeds to step S2007. However, if it is a V-long jackpot (YES in S2004), it is determined whether it is time to start the 10th round, which allows passage to the specific area 16 (S2005). If it is not time to start the 10th round (NO in S2005), the process proceeds directly to step S2007. On the other hand, if it is time to start the 10th round (YES in S2005), V valid period setting processing is performed (S2006).

In the V valid period setting process (S2006), the period during which the second large winning opening 15 is open and the few seconds after the second large winning opening 15 is closed in the 10th round of a V long jackpot are set as the V valid period during which detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be valid. In this embodiment, periods other than this (including when a jackpot game is not being played) are set as the V invalid period during which detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is determined to be invalid. Here, determining that detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is valid means that the V flag is turned ON based on detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a. Also, determining that detection of a gaming ball by the specific area sensor 16a is invalid means that the V flag is not turned ON even if a gaming ball is detected by the specific area sensor 16a.

In step S2007, the large prize openings (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) are opened according to an opening pattern (see Figure 29) corresponding to the type of jackpot. The distribution member 16k always moves in a constant manner from the start of the first round of play. In the opening pattern for a V-long jackpot, the AT opening/closing member 14k is opened in the 10th round so that a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 can pass through the specific area 16 with ease. In contrast, in the opening pattern for a V-short jackpot, the opening timing of the AT opening/closing member 14k relative to the operation of the distribution member 16k is set so that a game ball that has entered the second large prize opening 15 cannot pass through the specific area 16 in the 10th round.

Next, in step S2008, a round designation command transmission determination process is performed, and this process ends. The round designation command transmission determination process (S2008) determines whether the opening of the large prize openings (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) in step S2003 was the first opening in a single round of play, and if so, a round designation command containing information on the number of rounds in the ongoing large prize game is set in the output buffer of the game RAM 104. Note that in this embodiment, the large prize openings are not opened multiple times during a single round of play. Therefore, a round designation command is always set in this step S2008.

In step S2002 of the special electric device processing (S908), if the large prize openings (first large prize opening 14, second large prize opening 15) are open, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the large prize openings are met (S2009). In this mode, the closing conditions are met when either the number of prizes won by the large prize openings in that round of play reaches the specified maximum number of prizes (10 prizes per round in this mode), or the time for closing the large prize openings has arrived (i.e., the specified opening time (see Figure 29) has elapsed since the large prize openings were opened). If the conditions for closing the large prize openings are not met (NO in S2009), processing ends.

On the other hand, if the closing conditions for the major prize openings (first major prize opening 14, second major prize opening 15) are met (YES in S2009), the major prize openings are closed (blocked) (S2010). Then, it is determined whether one round of play (round interval) has ended (S2011). If it has not ended (NO in S2011), processing ends. On the other hand, if the round of play has ended (YES in S2011), the value of the round counter is decremented by 1 (S2012), and it is determined whether the value of the round counter is "0" (S2013). If it is not "0" (NO in S2013), processing ends as is to start the next round of play.

On the other hand, if the value is "0" (YES in S2013), the jackpot ending command is set (S2014) and the jackpot ending is started (S2015) as the jackpot ending process that ends the jackpot game. Then, the jackpot ending flag is set (S2016) and the process ends.

Also, if the jackpot end flag is ON in step S2001 (YES in S2001), the final round has ended, so it is determined whether the ending time for the jackpot game has elapsed (S2017). If the ending time has not elapsed (NO in S2017), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ending time has elapsed (YES in S2017), the jackpot end flag is turned OFF (S2018). Then, the game status setting process described below is performed (S2019). Next, the jackpot flag is turned OFF (S2020). The special operation status is set to "1" (S2021). Next, if the RAM clear flag is ON (YES in S2022), it is turned OFF (S2023), and this process ends. Therefore, it is possible to determine from the RAM clear flag whether a jackpot game has occurred after power-on, which involves RAM clearing.

[Game Status Setting Process] As shown in FIG. 49, the game status setting process (S2019) first determines whether the V flag is ON (whether a V win occurred during the V valid period) (S2101). If it is ON (YES in S2101), the probability change flag is set ON (S2102), and the time-saving flag is set ON (S2103). This results in a high probability state and time-saving state after the jackpot game. Next, a predetermined number of probability change events is set in the probability change counter (S2104), and a predetermined number of time-saving events is set in the time-saving counter (S2105), and the process proceeds to step S2108. The number of probability change events set in the probability change counter and the number of time-saving events set in the time-saving counter are each numbers corresponding to the winning symbol (jackpot symbol) that triggered the execution of the current jackpot game. In this embodiment, the number of probability change events is set to the same number as the number of time-saving events.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2101 that the V flag is not ON (NO in S2101), the time-saving flag is turned ON (S2106). In other words, the probability variable flag is not turned ON in this case. As a result, after the jackpot game, the game is controlled to a low probability state (normal probability state) and a time-saving state. Next, a predetermined number of time-saving times is set in the time-saving counter (S2107), and the process proceeds to step S2108. The number of time-saving times set in the time-saving counter is the number corresponding to the winning symbol (jackpot symbol) that triggered the execution of this jackpot game.

In step S2108, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game status flag update processing. The game status flag update processing (S2108) of the game status setting processing (S2019) can be performed in the same manner as the game status flag update processing (S1523) of the game status management processing (S1504) at the end of special pattern variation.

8-4. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 Next, the operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 of this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 50 to 52. Note that counters, timers, flags, buffers, etc. that appear in the description of the operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 are provided in the performance RAM 124 unless otherwise specified. Note that in this embodiment, the sub-RAM clear flag is provided in the performance FeRAM 125. For this reason, the sub-RAM clear flag provided in the performance FeRAM 125 is properly maintained even during periods when power is not supplied. Flags, counters, etc. other than the sub-RAM clear flag may also be provided in the performance FeRAM 125.

[Power-on processing] The performance control microcomputer 121 is capable of executing power-on processing (S4001). Note that power-on processing (S4001) is executed only once after power is turned on and is not executed thereafter. As shown in FIG. 50, the power-on processing (S4001) determines whether the sub-side power-off flag (a flag that is turned ON when power is turned off) is ON and whether the contents of the performance RAM 124 are normal (S4051). If the result of this determination is NO, that is, if the sub-side power-off flag is not ON, or if the sub-side power-off flag is ON but the contents of the performance RAM 124 are not normal, the performance RAM 124 is initialized (S4052) and the process proceeds to step S4055.

On the other hand, if the judgment result is YES (YES in S4051), that is, if the sub-side power failure flag has been turned ON due to a power failure but the contents of the presentation RAM 124 are maintained normally, the process then determines whether a RAM clear notification command has been received (S4053). If a RAM clear notification command has been received (YES in S4053), the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 has been cleared. Therefore, the sub-RAM clear flag is turned ON (S4054), and the presentation RAM 124 of the sub-control board 120 is cleared (S4052), and the process proceeds to step S4055. On the other hand, if a RAM clear notification command has not been received (NO in S4053), the process proceeds to step S4055 without executing steps S4054 and S4052. In other words, the sub-RAM clear flag is turned ON in response to the game RAM 104 of the main control board 100 being initialized. Additionally, the sub-RAM clear flag is turned OFF when a jackpot game is played, as described below.

In step S4055, other initial settings are made. These initial settings include, for example, settings for the performance CPU 122, SIO, PIO, CTC (circuit for managing interrupt time), etc. Also, if the sub-side power-off flag is ON, it is turned OFF.

[Received Command Analysis Processing] In the received command analysis processing (S4201), as shown in FIG. 51, the presentation control microcomputer 121 first determines whether a start winning command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4401), and then performs the received, pre-reading presentation selection processing (S4402). In the pre-reading presentation selection processing (S4402), the start winning command (see FIG. 36) is analyzed and, based on the analysis results, the microcomputer determines whether to execute a pre-reading presentation that indicates the expected probability of winning, and, if so, the type of pre-reading presentation (e.g., a hold change presentation, a cut-in preview presentation, a step-up preview presentation, a presentation that changes the color of an effect image or background image, etc.). This determines whether to execute a pre-reading presentation, and, if the type of pre-reading presentation is determined, sets the pre-reading presentation command for executing the determined pre-reading presentation in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124. When the pre-reading presentation command is sent to the image control board 140, a pre-reading presentation corresponding to the pre-reading presentation command is executed, thereby indicating the expected probability of winning, etc.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4403), and if so, performs the fluctuation performance start process (S4404). In the fluctuation performance start process (S4404), the fluctuation start command is analyzed, and based on the analysis results, the performance design, fluctuation performance pattern, preview performance, etc. are selected, and the fluctuation performance start command for starting the fluctuation performance is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124. Upon receiving the fluctuation performance start command, the image control board 140 reads out the specified performance image from the image ROM 142 and performs the fluctuation performance on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50.

Next, the performance control microcomputer 121 determines whether a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4405), and if so, performs a fluctuation performance end process (S4406). In the fluctuation performance end process (S4406), the fluctuation stop command is analyzed, and based on the analysis results, a fluctuation performance end command for ending the fluctuation performance is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines whether a game state designation command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4407), and if so, performs the special chart 1 variation recommendation display process (S4408), which will be described later.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether an opening command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4409), and if so, performs opening effect selection processing (S4410). In the opening effect selection processing (S4410), the opening command is analyzed and, based on the analysis results, the pattern (content) of the opening effect to be executed during the opening of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an opening effect start command for starting the opening effect with the selected opening effect pattern is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines whether an ending command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4411). If so, if the sub-RAM clear flag is ON (YES in S4412), it turns it OFF (S4413) and performs the ending presentation selection process (S4414). In the ending presentation selection process (S4414), the ending command is analyzed and, based on the analysis results, a presentation pattern (presentation content) for the ending presentation to be executed during the ending of the jackpot game is selected. Then, an ending presentation start command for starting the ending presentation with the selected presentation pattern is set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124.

Next, the effect control microcomputer 121 determines whether a V-passing command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4415), and if so, performs V-passing notification effect start processing (S4416). In the V-passing notification effect start processing (S4416), a V-passing notification effect start command for starting the V-passing notification effect is set in the output buffer of the effect RAM 124. The V-passing notification effect is an effect for notifying the player that a V-passing (passing into the specific area 16) has occurred. In this embodiment, this is an effect in which a predetermined V-passing notification image (for example, a character image showing the letter "V") is displayed on the display unit 50a. In this pachinko gaming machine 1, which controls to enter a high-probability state based on passing into the specific area 16, the display of the character image "V" as this V-passing notification effect also serves as a notification of a transition to a high-probability state. Note that the V-passing notification effect may take other forms, such as outputting a special sound effect from the speaker 52.

Next, the presentation control microcomputer 121 determines whether a prize ball command or payout command has been received from the main control board 100 (S4417), and if so, performs prize ball-related processing (S4417). In the prize ball-related processing (S4417), for example, a payout start command is set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124 to display an image that can indicate the number of game balls that will be paid out as prize balls.

Next, as other processing (S4419), processing based on received commands other than the above commands is performed, and the received command analysis processing is completed.

[Special Chart 1 Change Recommendation Display Processing] In the Special Chart 1 Change Recommendation Display Processing (S4408), first, as shown in FIG. 52, the presentation control microcomputer 121 analyzes the game state designation command (S4601). Next, it determines whether or not the game is in a non-time-saving state (S4602). If the game is not in a non-time-saving state (NO in S4602), the process proceeds to step S4607. If the game is in a non-time-saving state (YES in S4602), it determines whether or not the sub-RAM clear flag is OFF (S4603). If the sub-RAM clear flag is not OFF (NO in S4603), the process proceeds to step S4607. If the sub-RAM clear flag is OFF (YES in S4603), it determines whether or not the game is in a jackpot state or the pattern related to Special Chart 2 is changing (S4604). If a jackpot game is occurring or a pattern change related to special symbol 2 is in progress (YES in S4604), the program proceeds to step S4607. However, if a jackpot game is not occurring or a pattern change related to special symbol 2 is not in progress (NO in S4603), the program sets the special symbol 1 change recommendation image display command and the special symbol 1 change recommendation background display command in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 (S4605, S4606), and the program proceeds to step S4609. Upon receiving the special symbol 1 change recommendation image display command, the image control board 140 begins displaying the special symbol 1 change recommendation image on the display unit 50a. The special symbol 1 change recommendation image is an image that can suggest that the player should place the game ball in the first starting hole 11 and enter the lottery for special symbol 1. Upon receiving the special symbol 1 change recommendation background display command, the image control board 140 begins displaying the special symbol 1 change recommendation background image on the display unit 50a. The special chart 1 variation recommendation background image is a background image that can suggest that it is recommended to enter the game ball into the first starting hole 11 and take part in the special chart 1 lottery.

In step S4607, it is determined whether the special chart 1 variation recommended image is currently being displayed, and if the special chart 1 variation recommended image is currently being displayed (YES in S4607), a special chart 1 variation recommended image end command is set in the output buffer of the performance RAM 124 (S4608). Upon receiving the special chart 1 variation recommended image end command, the image control board 140 erases the special chart 1 variation recommended image currently being displayed on the display unit 50a.

In step S4609, other processing is performed based on the game status designation command (for example, processing to set the value of the game status status indicating the current game status based on the game status designation command in order to grasp the game status). This completes the special chart 1 change recommendation display processing (S4408).

In this way, when the sub-RAM clear flag is OFF and the effect control microcomputer 121 of this embodiment is controlled to the non-time-saving state, it displays the special chart 1 change recommended background image while setting the background image to the special chart 1 change recommended background image. In other words, the special chart 1 change recommended image and the special chart 1 change recommended background image are displayed when the non-time-saving state is entered after a jackpot game. More specifically, the special chart 1 change recommended image and the special chart 1 change recommended background image are displayed when the power is turned on with RAM clearing, at least one jackpot game is played, and the game is controlled to the non-time-saving state from a game state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state C, jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state.
On the other hand, when the time-saving mode is not active and the sub-RAM clear flag is ON, the special chart 1 change recommendation image and special chart 1 change recommendation background image are not displayed. Even if the special chart 1 change recommendation image is displayed, it is switched to hidden. For example, when the special chart 1 change recommendation image is displayed in the non-time-saving mode and the player throws a game ball into the first starting hole 11, causing the special chart 1 pattern to change, and the game is controlled to the normal time-saving mode or the slight time-saving mode based on this pattern change, or when a jackpot game is initiated, the special chart 1 change recommendation image is hidden. Furthermore, even in the non-time-saving mode, if the power is turned on with RAM clearing and no jackpot game has been played, the special chart 1 change recommendation image will not be displayed.

8-5. Game Flow in This Form Next, the game flow in this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on Figure 53. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is started with the flags and other parameters reset to their initial settings when power is applied via the RAM clear switch 119. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is started with the RAM cleared upon power application, the game state is in a non-time-saving state (normal game state). Furthermore, the probability fluctuation function is not activated, resulting in a low-probability state (normal probability state). When this specific power condition is met, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 preferably first plays the game by hitting the ball left-handed to ensure that it enters the first starting slot 11. This is because the low-probability and non-time-saving state makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting slot 12. If the game ball enters the first starting slot 11, a lottery for Special Chart 1 is held, and a jackpot may be won based on this.

In the low-probability state and non-time-saving state, jackpots based on the lottery for Special Chart 1 can be either a V-long jackpot or a V-short jackpot. If a V-long jackpot is won, a 10-round jackpot game is played, followed by control to a high-probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state). For the high-probability state and time-saving state A, the number of chance mode cycles and the number of time-saving mode cycles are both set to 100. This state continues until the next jackpot game is played, or the number of consecutive pattern variations (non-specified number) resulting in a loss equals the number of time-saving mode cycles (probability mode cycles). On the other hand, if a V-short jackpot is won, a 10-round jackpot game is played, followed by control to a low-probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state). For the low-probability state and time-saving state A, the number of time-saving mode cycles is set to 100. This state continues until the next jackpot game is played, or the number of consecutive pattern variations (non-specified number) resulting in a loss equals the number of time-saving mode cycles.

On the other hand, the lottery result for Special Chart 1, which is based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11, is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. Furthermore, the lottery result for Special Chart 2, which is based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11, may be a special miss (normal time-saving miss, slight time-saving miss). If the special miss symbol is Missing Symbol A (normal time-saving miss), the number of time-saving cycles is controlled to Time-saving State C (normal time-saving state) of 100 cycles, and if it is Missing Symbol B (slight time-saving miss), the number of time-saving cycles is controlled to Time-saving State CL (slight time-saving state) of 10,000 cycles. Both Time-saving State C and Time-saving State CL are low-probability states.

Time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a state in which it is difficult to score a ball into the second starting hole 12, making it difficult to score a ball. For this reason, it is preferable to play with the left hand in order to aim for the ball to score into the first starting hole 11. If the game is played with the left hand and the game ball scores into the first starting hole 11, a lottery for special chart 1 is held, and based on this, a jackpot may be won. Even in the lottery for special chart 1 in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state), it is possible to win a V-long jackpot or a V-short jackpot.

On the other hand, the lottery result for Special Chart 1 based on a ball entering the first starting hole 11 is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. Furthermore, the lottery result for Special Chart 1 based on a ball entering the first starting hole 11 in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) may be a special miss. However, when the number of remaining time-saving periods in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is two or more, even if it is a special miss, the game state is not controlled to the time-saving state based on this, and the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is maintained and the remaining number of time-saving periods continues to be counted. However, when the number of remaining time-saving periods is one, that is, when the lottery result for the last pattern change in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a special miss, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state (time-saving state C or time-saving state CL) corresponding to the missing pattern (missing pattern A or missing pattern B). However, in this version, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is set to 10,000, so the non-specific number of times (number of consecutive misses) in the time-saving state CL almost never reaches the number of time-saving times.

In the normal time-saving states of high probability and time-saving state A, low probability and time-saving state A, and low probability and time-saving state C, the second starting hole 12 is in an easy-to-score state where the ball is frequently available, so it is preferable to play by hitting with the right. If the game is played by hitting with the right and the game ball enters the second starting hole 12, a lottery for special chart 2 is held, and a jackpot may be won based on this. It is also possible to win a V-long jackpot or V-short jackpot in the lottery for special chart 2 in the high probability and time-saving state A, low probability and time-saving state A, and low probability and time-saving state C.

On the other hand, the lottery result for Special Chart 2, based on the ball entering the second starting hole 12, is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. Furthermore, when the non-specific number of times (number of consecutive misses) in the low-probability state and time-saving state A, and the low-probability state and time-saving state C, reaches the time-saving count, the time-saving state ends, and control is made to the low-probability state and non-time-saving state. In the high-probability state and time-saving state A, when the non-specific number of times (number of consecutive misses) reaches the time-saving count, both the high-probability state and the time-saving state end, and control is made to the low-probability state and non-time-saving state.

In pachinko gaming machine PY1, as long as a player continues to win the jackpot in the special drawing for special drawing 2 in time-saving state A and time-saving state C, the player's hand will remain in a favorable state, primarily focused on the drawing for special drawing 2, without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. In other words, the high-probability state and time-saving state A, the low-probability state and time-saving state A, and the low-probability state and time-saving state C are more favorable game states for the player than the non-time-saving state. The jackpot game state in which a jackpot game is being played is also more favorable to the player than the non-time-saving state. On the other hand, the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state), in which the probability of winning a normal time-saving miss, which triggers the transition to time-saving state C, is lower than the non-time-saving state in the special drawing, can be said to be more disadvantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state. Therefore, the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is not a more favorable game state for the player than the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, in this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1, a player can acquire many game balls by winning consecutive jackpots in a state that is advantageous to the player and primarily involves the drawing of special chart 2. For this reason, time-saving state C, which is controlled in response to a special miss, has a rescue effect, as it allows the player to transition to a state primarily involving the drawing of special chart 2 without going through a jackpot.

8-6. Presentation Examples in This Form 8-6-1. Presentation Mode Next, presentation examples in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this form will be described with reference to Figures 54 to 57. First, the presentation mode will be described. The presentation mode is a form of presentation using the image display device 50, speaker 52, frame lamp 53, board lamp 54, etc., and when the presentation mode is different, for example, the characters, items, background images, etc. displayed on the image display device 50 will be different, and variable presentations using the presentation symbols EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 will also be executed in a form corresponding to the presentation mode.

The presentation modes of this form include a ground background mode in which a ground background image as shown in Figure 54 is displayed, a space background mode in which a space background image as shown in Figure 55(A) is displayed, a first sky background mode and a second sky background mode in which sky background images as shown in Figure 55(B) and Figure 55(C), respectively, are displayed, and a launch base background mode in which a launch base background image as shown in Figure 56 is displayed.

The ground background mode (Figure 54) is a presentation mode that may be set when the second starting hole 12 is in a non-easily scored state, i.e., when it is in a low probability state and non-time-saving state (normal game state), or when it is in a low probability state and time-saving state CL (slightly time-saving state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the ground background mode is set when it is in a slightly time-saving state. Therefore, the ground background mode and its background image have the function of suggesting that it is in a slightly time-saving state (time-saving state CL). The ground background mode is also set when it is in a non-time-saving state when no jackpot game has been played since the RAM was cleared. In other words, the ground background mode is a presentation mode that may be set when play is progressing with the aim of hitting the first starting hole 11. The ground background mode further includes a day background mode in which a daytime ground background image (daytime background image GH1) shown in Figure 54(A) is displayed, an evening background mode in which an evening ground background image (evening background image GH2) shown in Figure 54(B) is displayed, and a night background mode in which a background image showing a nighttime ground scene (night background image GH3) shown in Figure 54(C) is displayed.

The space background mode (Figure 55 (A)) is a presentation mode that is set when the game is in a high probability state and time-saving state A. In the space background mode, a space background image GH5 is displayed. The space background mode and its background image have the function of suggesting a high probability state and time-saving state A. The first sky background mode (Figure 55 (B)) is a presentation mode that is set when the game is in a low probability state and time-saving state A. In the first sky background mode, a first sky background image GH6 is displayed. The first sky background mode and its background image have the function of suggesting a low probability state and time-saving state A. The second sky background mode (Figure 55 (C)) is a presentation mode that is set when the game is in a low probability state and time-saving state C. In the second sky background mode, a second sky background image GH7 is displayed. The second sky background mode and its background image have the function of suggesting a low probability state and time-saving state C. In other words, the space background mode, first sky background mode, and second sky background mode are all modes that are set when the ball is easily scored during the normal time-saving mode, and are presentation modes that are set when the game is progressing with the aim of hitting the second starting hole 12.

Figure 55 shows an example of an image displayed on the display unit 50a in the normal time-saving mode. As mentioned above, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1, in the normal time-saving mode, it is advantageous to play by hitting the ball to the right and aiming for the second starting hole 12. Therefore, the presentation control microcomputer 121 can display a right-hit notification image GR in the upper right corner of the display unit 50a, informing the player that they should play by hitting the ball to the right in order to aim for the second starting hole 12. Note that if the display device 8 is equipped with a lamp or the like that can instruct a right or left hit, it is preferable that the lamp also displays information that allows the player to play advantageously in each game mode. Specifically, if the display device 8 has a right-hit lamp that instructs a right hit, it is preferable that the game control microcomputer 101 light the right-hit lamp in the normal time-saving mode. Furthermore, a maximum number of executions (number of time-saving attempts) is set in the normal time-saving mode. Therefore, in the normal time-saving mode, the performance control microcomputer 121 may display a remaining number display GN that indicates the number of remaining times for the time-saving mode, in order to indicate when the normal time-saving mode will end.

The launch base background mode (Figure 56) is a presentation mode that may be set when the second starting hole 12 is in a non-scoring state, i.e., when the game is in a low probability state and non-time-saving state (normal game state). Specifically, it is a presentation mode that may be set when the game is in a non-time-saving state after at least one jackpot has been played after the RAM has been cleared. In the launch base background mode, the launch base background image GH10 is displayed. The launch base background mode and its background image have the function of suggesting that the game is in a non-time-saving state.

As mentioned above, when the game is in a non-time-saving state where no jackpot has been played since the RAM was cleared, the same ground background mode as the slight time-saving state is set. In this mode, the non-time-saving state and the slight time-saving state are the same in that they are both states where it is not easy to score a ball. However, while in the non-time-saving state it is possible to transition to the normal time-saving state (time-saving state C) based on a normal time-saving miss, in the slight time-saving state transition to the normal time-saving state based on a special miss is restricted. In other words, in this mode, the non-time-saving state is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state. Therefore, the launch base background mode and its background image have the function of suggesting that it is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state.

8-6-2. Special Chart 1 Variation Recommendation Display Next, we will explain the Special Chart 1 Variation Recommendation Display. The Special Chart 1 Variation Recommendation Display is a display that may be executed in the launch base background mode. Figure 57(A) is a diagram showing the transition to the launch base background mode. That is, Figure 57(A) shows the display unit 50a when transitioning from a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a non-time-saving state to a non-time-saving state. Figure 57(A) displays the launch base background image GH10. Also, in the launch base background mode, a launch instruction image GS is displayed. The launch instruction image GS is an image that can suggest a recommendation to place the game ball in the first starting hole 11 and enter the lottery for Special Chart 1. In other words, the launch instruction image GS is a special chart 1 variation recommendation image. Furthermore, the launch base background image GH10 is the background image when the launch instruction image GS is displayed. Therefore, the launch base background image GH10 is a special chart 1 variation recommendation background image. Furthermore, in the pachinko game machine PY1, in the non-time-saving state, it is advantageous to play by hitting with the left side and aiming at the first starting hole 11. Therefore, the performance control microcomputer 121 can display a left-hit notification image GL in the upper right corner of the display unit 50a to notify the player that they should play by hitting with the left side in order to aim at the first starting hole 11.

The launch base background mode is set when the game is in a non-time-saving mode and at least one jackpot has been played after the RAM is cleared. In other words, it is set when the state favorable to the player, primarily the drawing of Special Chart 2, ends after a jackpot and the game is controlled to a non-time-saving mode. In this situation, the player tends to end play. However, in a non-time-saving mode, there is a possibility that the player will win the regular time-saving drawing in the drawing of Special Chart 1. In other words, ending play in a non-time-saving mode could be detrimental to the player. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 121 of this form can encourage the player to continue playing and avoid losing profits, even in a non-time-saving mode after the state favorable to the player, primarily the drawing of Special Chart 2 after a jackpot, ends, by using the special chart 1 variation recommendation effect.

In the launch base background mode, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 11 and the lottery for Special Chart 1 begins, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute a time-saving entry effect (see notes in Figure 32). In this form of time-saving entry effect, an image is displayed indicating whether the rocket will be launched normally.

If the result of the lottery for Special Chart 1 is a normal time-saving miss (missing symbol A), the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the time-saving entry effect in a successful mode, as shown in Figure 57 (B). In this mode, the successful time-saving entry effect displays an image of a rocket being launched normally. In this case, since the result of the lottery for Special Chart 1 is a normal time-saving miss (missing symbol A), control is exercised to enter the normal time-saving state (time-saving state C). Therefore, after performing the successful time-saving entry effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the effect mode to the second sky background mode corresponding to the normal time-saving state (time-saving state C), as shown in Figure 57 (C), in response to control to enter the normal time-saving state (time-saving state C).

On the other hand, if the result of the lottery for Special Chart 1 is a slight time-saving miss (missing symbol B), the effect control microcomputer 121 performs the time-saving entry effect in a failed mode, as shown in Figure 57 (D). In this mode, the time-saving entry effect in a failed mode displays an image of the rocket not being launched properly. In this case, since the result of the lottery for Special Chart 1 is a slight time-saving miss (missing symbol B), control is exercised to enter the slight time-saving state (time-saving state CL). Therefore, after performing the time-saving entry effect in a failed mode, the effect control microcomputer 121 sets the presentation mode to the ground background mode corresponding to the slight time-saving state (time-saving state CL), as shown in Figure 57 (E). Furthermore, after control is exercised to enter the ground background mode, a left-hit notification image GL is displayed on the display unit 50a for a predetermined period of time. This appropriately notifies the player that the game will then proceed with left-hit play.

In addition, the launch base background mode in this form is a presentation mode with content related to the previous presentation mode. In other words, in the launch base background mode, after a presentation is performed in the space background mode or sky background mode set in the normal time-saving state, an image is displayed with content suggesting a return to such a presentation mode. For this reason, the launch base background mode and the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation have the function of suggesting that even after the state advantageous to players, which is mainly based on the drawing of special chart 2 after a jackpot, has ended, there is a higher chance of returning to that state than in the slight time-saving state. Therefore, players are less likely to quit playing, even after the state advantageous to players, which is mainly based on the drawing of special chart 2 after a jackpot, has ended. This prevents players from unknowingly becoming disadvantaged.

8-7. Main Effects of the First Embodiment As described in detail above, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to this embodiment has a second start opening 12 in which game balls are more likely to enter the machine in the easy-to-enter state (normal time-saving state) than in the non-easy-to-enter state (non-time-saving state, slight time-saving state), and a first start opening 11 in which the ease of game balls entering the machine remains the same between the easy-to-enter state and the non-easy-to-enter state. The machine also has a game control microcomputer 101 that can execute pattern changes involving variable and stationary display of special symbols based on the entry of game balls into the first start opening 11 and the second start opening 12, and that, when a jackpot symbol is displayed stationary, enters a jackpot gaming state involving the opening of the jackpot openings (first jackpot opening 14, second jackpot opening 15). When in the non-time-saving state, which is one of the states where ball entry is not easy, the game control microcomputer 101 may switch to the normal time-saving state (time-saving state C) by displaying the special symbol as a missing symbol A (a time-saving missing mode) different from the jackpot symbol. Furthermore, when the special symbol is displayed as a missing symbol B (a time-saving missing mode) different from both the jackpot symbol and the missing symbol A (a time-saving missing mode), the game control microcomputer 101 may switch to the slight time-saving state (time-saving state CL). In addition, the game control microcomputer 121 may switch to the non-time-saving state after a favorable game state (normal time-saving state) that is more advantageous to the player than the non-time-saving state. When in the non-time-saving state, the effect control microcomputer 121 may execute a special symbol 1 change recommendation effect on the display unit 50a. The special symbol 1 change recommendation effect is an image that can suggest that the player should enter the first starting hole 11 and take the special symbol 1 lottery, and is an effect that can suggest that the game state is more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state. This prevents the player from losing profits, thereby increasing the interest of the player.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 does not execute the special chart 1 change recommendation effect when in the micro-time-saving state. This makes it possible to increase the player's confidence in the special chart 1 change recommendation effect. Therefore, the special chart 1 change recommendation effect can increase interest.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 may enter a non-time-saving state after power is turned on. Then, the presentation control microcomputer 121 may execute a special chart 1 change recommendation presentation in a non-time-saving state after a favorable gaming state (normal time-saving state), but does not execute a special chart 1 change recommendation presentation in a non-time-saving state after power is turned on. By the time the favorable gaming state (normal time-saving state) is reached, it is likely that the player has been playing for a certain amount of time. And in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, it is possible to prevent players who have been playing for a certain amount of time from being disadvantaged by the special chart 1 change recommendation presentation.

Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 121 can display an image related to the ground background mode (day background image GH1, evening background image GH2, night background image GH3) as a background image on the display unit 50a when in the minute-time-saving mode. Then, in the non-time-saving mode after power-on, an image related to the ground background mode (day background image GH1, evening background image GH2, night background image GH3) may be displayed as a background image. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment can execute the special chart 1 variation recommendation effect for players who have been playing for a certain amount of time, while making it difficult for players who start playing in the non-time-saving mode after power-on to distinguish between the minute-time-saving mode and the non-time-saving mode. Therefore, for players who are just about to start playing, it is difficult to distinguish between the minute-time-saving mode and the non-time-saving mode, which can increase interest.

8-8. Modifications of the First Embodiment Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. In the description of the modifications, the same components as those of the above embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components of the modifications may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in this embodiment and the following modifications may be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

For example, in this embodiment, only special misses are present as the losing symbols for Special Chart 1. However, the losing symbols for Special Chart 1 may include not only special misses but also normal misses that are not controlled to the time-saving state. For example, a special miss may be provided as the losing symbol for Special Chart 2. In other words, the types and numbers of the losing symbols for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 described in this embodiment are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate. The same applies to jackpot symbols. Furthermore, as long as the non-time-saving state tends to be more advantageous to the player than the slight time-saving state, for example, there may be no slight time-saving miss as the losing symbol for Special Chart 1, and a slight time-saving miss may be provided as the losing symbol for Special Chart 2. Furthermore, for example, the number of time-saving periods and the number of probability bonus periods shown in this embodiment are merely examples and can, of course, be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, for example, the type and number of jackpot games and the specific content of the jackpot games may also be changed as appropriate. For example, after a jackpot, it is possible to set a pattern in which the game is not controlled to the time-saving state but is controlled to the non-time-saving state.

Also, for example, the presentation control microcomputer 121 may be configured to be started up in a state where a specific power supply condition is met in which RAM is cleared upon power-on, and not to perform the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation when in a non-time-saving mode (normal game mode). The presentation control microcomputer 121, which does not perform the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation when in a non-time-saving mode (normal game mode), may be capable of displaying an image related to the ground background mode as a background image on the display unit 50a. That is, for example, when started up in a state in which a specific power supply condition is met in which RAM is cleared upon power-on, the presentation control microcomputer 121 may make a special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation determination as to whether or not to perform the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation, and if it determines that the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation should be performed, it may perform the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation, but if it determines that the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation should not be performed, it may not perform the special chart 1 variation recommendation presentation. Such a presentation control microcomputer 121 may, for example, determine with a predetermined probability that a special chart 1 variation recommended presentation will be performed in the special chart 1 variation recommended presentation determination. For example, when the presentation control microcomputer 121 is started up in a state where a specific power supply condition in which RAM is cleared upon power-on is met, it may display a selection screen that allows the user to choose whether or not to perform a special chart 1 variation recommended presentation, and if a selection input to perform a special chart 1 variation recommended presentation is made while the screen is displayed, it may determine in the special chart 1 variation recommended presentation determination that a special chart 1 variation recommended presentation will be performed. Alternatively, when the presentation control microcomputer 121 is started up in a state where a specific power supply condition in which RAM is cleared upon power-on is met, it may display a selection screen that allows the user to choose whether or not to perform a special chart 1 variation recommended presentation, and if a selection input to not perform a special chart 1 variation recommended presentation is made while the screen is displayed, it may determine in the special chart 1 variation recommended presentation determination that a special chart 1 variation recommended presentation will not be performed. Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 may be configured to not perform the special chart 1 change recommendation effect in a non-time-saving state when at least one jackpot game has been played after the RAM has been cleared. In this case, a special chart 1 change recommendation effect determination can be made as to whether or not to perform the special chart 1 change recommendation effect. The content of the special chart 1 change recommendation effect is not limited to the content described above and can be changed as appropriate. That is, the special chart 1 change recommendation effect may be an effect that displays an image that is the same as or related to the image displayed in the game state immediately prior to the non-time-saving state. Specifically, for example, the special chart 1 change recommendation effect may be an effect that displays an image that shows a mode (zone) that is the same as or related to the mode (or zone) of the game state immediately prior to the non-time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described in detail the pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a so-called "ST machine" among the types of pachinko gaming machines known as "Type 1" or "Digipachi," in which the winning probability is controlled to a high probability state during the ST (Special Time) period. However, the gaming machine may also be a "Type 1" pachinko gaming machine other than an "ST machine." Furthermore, for example, it may also be a so-called "Type 1/Type 2 hybrid" pachinko gaming machine that combines the features of a "Type 1" pachinko gaming machine and the features of a "Type 2" pachinko gaming machine.

9. Second Embodiment Next, a second embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above is also applied to the second embodiment.

9-1. Main Games in the Gaming Machine The types of losses associated with the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be explained in detail with reference to Figure 58. As shown in Figure 58, there are two types of losing symbols determined by the drawing for special symbol 1 (losing symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display 81a), and there is one type of losing symbol determined by the drawing for special symbol 2 (losing symbols stopped and displayed on the special symbol 2 display 81b). Specifically, in the drawing for special symbol 1, either "special symbol 1_losing symbol A" or "special symbol 1_losing symbol B" is determined. In addition, in the drawing for special symbol 2, "special symbol 2_losing symbol C" is determined.

As shown in Figure 58, "Special symbol 1 - Missing symbol B" is a normal miss. "Special symbol 1 - Missing symbol A" and "Special symbol 2 - Missing symbol C" are special misses. A special miss is a miss that can trigger control of the time-saving state. In other words, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a special miss, the game control microcomputer 101 may control the game state after the missing symbol is displayed to the time-saving state.

"Special symbol 1_losing symbol A" is a regular time-saving miss, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Special symbol 1_losing symbol A," the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to time-saving state C, which is the regular time-saving state. For time-saving state C based on "Special symbol 1_losing symbol A," the game control microcomputer 101 sets the number of time-saving cycles to 100. "Special symbol 1_losing symbol B" is a regular miss.

"Special symbol 2_missing symbol C" is a slight time-saving miss, and if the result of the special symbol lottery is "Special symbol 1_missing symbol B," the game control microcomputer 101 controls the game to enter time-saving state CL, which is a slight time-saving state. For time-saving state CL based on "Special symbol 2_missing symbol C," the game control microcomputer 101 sets the number of time-saving times to a number according to the game state. Specifically, if the result of the special symbol lottery in the non-time-saving state, slight time-saving state, or time-saving state C is "Special symbol 2_missing symbol C," the number of time-saving times is set to 1,000. If the result of the special symbol lottery in the low probability state and non-time-saving state, slight time-saving state, or time-saving state C is "Special symbol 2_missing symbol C," the same applies to the low probability state and the high probability state. Additionally, if the result of the special symbol lottery in low probability state and time-saving state A is "Special symbol 2 - Missing symbol C," the number of time-saving times will be set to 100. If the result of the special symbol lottery in high probability state and time-saving state A, or high probability state and non-time-saving state is "Special symbol 2 - Missing symbol C," the number of time-saving times will be set to 10.

When comparing a high-probability state and time-saving state A with a low-probability state and time-saving state A, the high-probability state and time-saving state A is the more advantageous game state for the player. This is because the probability of hitting the jackpot symbol is higher. Furthermore, when comparing a low-probability state and time-saving state A with time-saving state C, the low-probability state and time-saving state A is the more advantageous game state for the player. This is because time-saving state C is a game state controlled based on a special miss, while time-saving state A is a game state controlled in response to a jackpot game being played. In other words, this is because a jackpot game has already been played. Therefore, when comparing "high-probability state and time-saving state A," "low-probability state and time-saving state A," and "time-saving state C" from the perspective of superiority, the order of superiority can be said to be "high-probability state and time-saving state A" > "low-probability state and time-saving state A" > "time-saving state C."

In this embodiment, if the result of the special symbol lottery during the time-saving state is "Special Symbol 2 - Missing Symbol C," the more advantageous the game state related to that time-saving state, the more likely it is to be controlled to a slight time-saving state (time-saving state CL) with fewer time-saving occurrences. Note that, in the time-saving state, the functions related to the frequency with which the second starting hole 12 enters a ball-scoring state per unit time can be the same as those described in the above embodiment.

9-2. Regarding the Start Winning Command As shown in FIG. 59, the start winning command generated in this embodiment also includes lottery result information, whether it is a big win, a normal loss, or a special loss.

9-3. Game Flow in This Form Next, the game flow in this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on Figure 60. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts up with flags and other settings reset to their initial settings when power is applied via the RAM clear switch 119. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts up with the specific power condition met, in which RAM is cleared upon power-on, the game state is in a non-time-saving state (normal game state). Furthermore, the probability fluctuation function is not activated, and the game is in a low-probability state (normal probability state). When the pachinko gaming machine PY1 starts up with this specific power condition met, it is preferable to first play by hitting the ball left-handed to ensure that the ball enters the first starting slot 11. This is because the low-probability and non-time-saving state makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting slot 12. If the game ball enters the first starting slot 11, a lottery for Special Chart 1 is held, and a jackpot may be won based on this.

In the low-probability state and non-time-saving state, jackpots based on the lottery for Special Chart 1 can be either a V-long jackpot or a V-short jackpot. If a V-long jackpot is won, a 10-round jackpot game is played, followed by control to a high-probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state). For the high-probability state and time-saving state A, the number of chance mode cycles and the number of time-saving mode cycles are both set to 100. This state continues until the next jackpot game is played, or the number of consecutive pattern variations (non-specified number) resulting in a loss equals the number of time-saving mode cycles (probability mode cycles). On the other hand, if a V-short jackpot is won, a 10-round jackpot game is played, followed by control to a low-probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state). For the low-probability state and time-saving state A, the number of time-saving mode cycles is set to 100. This state continues until the next jackpot game is played, or the number of consecutive pattern variations (non-specified number) resulting in a loss equals the number of time-saving mode cycles.

On the other hand, the lottery result for Special Chart 1, which is based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11, is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. Furthermore, the lottery result for Special Chart 2, which is based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11, may be a special miss (a regular time-saving miss). If the special miss symbol is miss symbol A (a regular time-saving miss), the number of time-saving cycles is controlled to Time-Saving State C (a regular time-saving state) of 100. Time-Saving State C is a low-probability state.

In the normal time-saving states of high probability and time-saving state A, low probability and time-saving state A, and low probability and time-saving state C, the second starting hole 12 is in an easy-to-score state where the ball is frequently available, so it is preferable to play by hitting with the right. If the game is played by hitting with the right and the game ball enters the second starting hole 12, a lottery for special chart 2 is held, and a jackpot may be won based on this. It is also possible to win a V-long jackpot or V-short jackpot in the lottery for special chart 2 in the high probability and time-saving state A, low probability and time-saving state A, and low probability and time-saving state C.

In pachinko gaming machine PY1, as long as a player continues to win the jackpot in the drawing for Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State A and Time-Saving State C, the player will continue to enjoy an advantageous state, primarily focused on the drawing for Special Chart 2, without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. In other words, the high-probability state and Time-Saving State A, the low-probability state and Time-Saving State A, and the low-probability state and Time-Saving State C are more advantageous gaming states for the player than the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state in which a jackpot game is being played is also more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

On the other hand, the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 based on the ball entering the second starting hole 12 is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. In the time-saving state, when there are two or more remaining time-saving attempts, even if the type of miss in the Special Chart 2 lottery result is a special miss, the game state thereafter will not be controlled to the time-saving state, and the number of remaining time-saving attempts will decrease. In the high-probability state, the number of remaining chance modes will be the same as the number of remaining time-saving attempts. However, when there is one remaining time-saving attempt, that is, if the result of the last Special Chart 2 lottery in the time-saving state is a special miss, the game state thereafter will be controlled to the time-saving state according to the type of special miss. In this form, the only type of miss that can be drawn in the Special Chart 2 lottery is miss pattern C, which is a slight time-saving miss. For this reason, if the result of the last lottery for Special Chart 2 in the high probability state and time-saving state A, the low probability state and time-saving state A, or the low probability state and time-saving state C is a losing symbol C, the subsequent game state will be controlled to the low probability state and time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state).

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of time-saving cycles in the low-probability state and time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state), which is controlled in response to a losing symbol C (slight time-saving miss), varies depending on the game state at the start of the symbol change related to the losing symbol C. Specifically, if the game state at the start of the symbol change related to the losing symbol C is a high-probability state and time-saving state A, the game is controlled to a slight time-saving state with 10 time-saving cycles in response to the losing symbol C being displayed stationary. If the game state at the start of the symbol change related to the losing symbol C is a low-probability state and time-saving state A, the game is controlled to a slight time-saving state with 100 time-saving cycles in response to the losing symbol C being displayed stationary. If the game state at the start of the symbol change related to the losing symbol C is a low-probability state and time-saving state C, the game is controlled to a slight time-saving state with 1000 time-saving cycles in response to the losing symbol C being displayed stationary.

Time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a state in which it is difficult to score a ball into the second starting hole 12, making it difficult to score a ball. For this reason, it is preferable to play with the left hand in order to aim for the ball to score into the first starting hole 11. If the game is played with the left hand and the game ball scores into the first starting hole 11, a lottery for special chart 1 is held, and based on this, a jackpot may be won. Even in the lottery for special chart 1 in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state), it is possible to win a V-long jackpot or a V-short jackpot.

On the other hand, the lottery result for Special Chart 1 based on a ball entering the first starting hole 11 is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. Furthermore, the lottery result for Special Chart 1 based on a ball entering the first starting hole 11 in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) may be a special miss. However, when the number of remaining time-saving periods is two or more in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state), even if it is a special miss, the game state is not controlled to the time-saving state based on this, and the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is maintained and the remaining number of time-saving periods continues to be counted. However, when the number of remaining time-saving periods is one, that is, when the lottery result for the last pattern change in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a special miss, the game state is controlled to time-saving state C (normal time-saving state) according to the missing pattern (missing pattern A (normal time-saving miss)). For this reason, in this form, if the lottery result for the last symbol change in the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a special miss, a time-saving entry effect can be performed. On the other hand, if the lottery result for the last symbol change in the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a normal miss, the game will be controlled to a low-probability state and non-time-saving state.

In this way, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment may transition to a minute time-shortening state when the non-specific number of plays in the game state related to the normal time-shortening state becomes the number of time-shortening plays. The number of time-shortening plays in the minute time-shortening state differs depending on the game state related to the previous normal time-shortening state. This gives the pachinko gaming machine PY1 a completely new type of gameplay that has never been seen before.

In addition, in this embodiment, the more advantageous the game state is in the normal time-saving state, the fewer the number of time-saving cycles can be set in the subsequent micro-time-saving state to which it transitions. Specifically, for a micro-time-saving state (time-saving state CL) controlled in response to the high-probability state and the non-specific number of cycles in time-saving state A reaching its upper limit, the number of micro-time-saving cycles is set to be fewer than for a micro-time-saving state (time-saving state CL) controlled in response to the low-probability state and the non-specific number of cycles in time-saving state A reaching its upper limit. Also, for a micro-time-saving state (time-saving state CL) controlled in response to the low-probability state and the non-specific number of cycles in time-saving state A reaching its upper limit, the number of micro-time-saving cycles is set to be fewer than for a micro-time-saving state (time-saving state CL) controlled in response to the low-probability state and the non-specific number of cycles in time-saving state C reaching its upper limit. Therefore, the more advantageous the game state was immediately beforehand for the player, the fewer symbol changes can be used to end the subsequent micro-time-saving state (time-saving state C).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the presentation control microcomputer 121 may display a remaining number display on the display unit 50a that can suggest the remaining number of times for the slight time reduction in the slight time reduction state (time reduction state CL), which is controlled in response to the non-specific number of times in the game state related to the normal time reduction state reaching its upper limit. The remaining number display that can suggest the remaining number of times for the slight time reduction may also be displayed in the same manner as the remaining number display GN that can suggest the remaining number of times for the slight time reduction. However, it is preferable that the remaining number display that can suggest the remaining number of times for the slight time reduction is not displayed in the same manner as the remaining number display GN, but is displayed in a different manner. Furthermore, the remaining number display that can suggest the remaining number of times for the slight time reduction may also be displayed only when the remaining number of times for the slight time reduction is less than a predetermined number.

Furthermore, the remaining number display, which can indicate the remaining number of times for micro-time saving, may be displayed in a micro-time saving state that is controlled in response to the non-specified number of times in a superior time-saving state (e.g., time-saving state A) reaching the upper limit, but may not be displayed in a micro-time saving state that is controlled in response to the non-specified number of times in an inferior time-saving state (e.g., time-saving state C) reaching the upper limit. Even in this case, the remaining number of times for micro-time saving may be displayed when the number of times remaining becomes less than a predetermined number for a micro-time saving state that is controlled in response to the non-specified number of times in an inferior time-saving state (e.g., time-saving state C) reaching the upper limit.

9-4. Main Effects of the Second Embodiment As described above in detail, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to this embodiment can be controlled to time-shortening state A, one of the normal time-shortening states, in response to the execution of a jackpot game. When the special symbols are stopped and displayed as jackpot symbols A or C, the game state after the jackpot game may be controlled to a high-probability state and time-shortening state A accordingly. On the other hand, when the special symbols are stopped and displayed as jackpot symbols B or D, the game state after the jackpot game may be controlled to a low-probability state and time-shortening state A accordingly. Furthermore, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol A in a non-time-shortening state, the game control microcomputer 101 may be controlled to time-shortening state C, a normal time-shortening state different from time-shortening state A. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 may be controlled to a slight time-shortening state (time-shortening state CL) in response to the non-specific number of times in the normal time-shortening state (time-shortening states A and C) reaching a set number of times of time-shortening. Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 may switch to the non-time-shortened state when the non-specific number of times in the micro-time-shortened state (time-shortened state CL) reaches a set number of times for time-shortened play. When the game control microcomputer 101 switches to the micro-time-shortened state when the non-specific number of times in the normal time-shortened state reaches the upper limit, the game control microcomputer 101 can set the number of times for micro-time-shortened play in the micro-time-shortened state to a different number depending on the type of normal time-shortened state in which the non-specific number of times reaches the upper limit. This novel gameplay feature can enhance the game's entertainment value.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to this embodiment can set the number of micro-time-saving turns to a smaller number for the micro-time-saving turn state (time-saving turn state CL) that is controlled in response to the non-specific number of turns in time-saving turn state A becoming the number of times for time-saving turn state compared to the micro-time-saving turn state (time-saving turn state CL) that is controlled in response to the non-specific number of turns in time-saving turn state C becoming the number of times for time-saving turn state. Therefore, in the time-saving turn state A after a jackpot, which is superior to the time-saving turn state C that has a rescue effect, after the time-saving turn state A ends and transitions to the micro-time-saving turn state, it is possible to transition to a state (the last time of the micro-time-saving turn state, the non-time-saving turn state) that is more likely to transition to the time-saving turn state C due to a normal time-saving turn failure than in the time-saving turn state C. This novel gameplay can further enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to this embodiment may control to a slight time-shortening state (time-shortening state CL) when the non-specified number of times in the high-probability state and time-shortening state A or the low-probability state and time-shortening state A reaches the set number of times of time-shortening. Furthermore, for the slight time-shortening state (time-shortening state CL) controlled in response to the non-specified number of times in the high-probability state and time-shortening state A reaching its upper limit (the greater of the number of chance bonuses or the number of time-shortening times), the game control microcomputer 101 can set the number of times of slight time-shortening to a lower number than the slight time-shortening state (time-shortening state CL) controlled in response to the non-specified number of times in the low-probability state and time-shortening state A reaching the time-shortening number. Therefore, in a high probability state and time-saving state A, which is superior to a low probability state and time-saving state A, after that state ends and transitions to a slight time-saving state, it is possible to transition earlier to a state where there is a higher possibility of transitioning to time-saving state C due to a normal time-saving miss (the last time in the slight time-saving state, a non-time-saving state) than in a low probability state and time-saving state A. This new gameplay feature can make the game even more entertaining.

9-5. Modifications of the Second Embodiment Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. In the description of the modifications, the same components as those of the above embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components of the modifications may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in this embodiment and the following modifications may be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

For example, in this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a normal miss exists as the losing symbol for Special Chart 1. However, the losing symbol for Special Chart 1 does not have to be a normal miss. For example, a configuration in which only a normal time-saving miss is provided is also possible. In other words, the types and number of losing symbols for Special Chart 1 and Special Chart 2 described in this embodiment are merely examples and can be changed as appropriate. The same applies to jackpot symbols. Also, for example, the number of time-saving cycles and the number of probability changes shown in this embodiment are merely examples and can, of course, be changed as appropriate. Furthermore, for example, the type and number of jackpot games and the specific content of the jackpot games can also be changed as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set a pattern in which, after a jackpot game, the game is not controlled to the time-saving state but is controlled to a non-time-saving state.

Also, for example, in this embodiment, a configuration has been described in which only one type of micro-time-saving miss exists as the losing symbol for Special Chart 2. However, for example, it is also possible to provide multiple micro-time-saving misses that are controlled to enter the micro-time-saving state as the losing symbol for Special Chart 2. In this case, for example, it is possible to configure a system in which the more advantageous the time-saving state, the more likely it is that a micro-time-saving miss with a smaller number of micro-time-saving times will be won. In other words, for a micro-time-saving state that is controlled in response to the non-specific number of times in a advantageous time-saving state (e.g., a high-probability state and time-saving state A) reaching the upper limit, the number of time-saving times in the micro-time-saving state should tend to be set to a smaller number than a micro-time-saving state that is controlled in response to the non-specific number of times in a time-saving state that is inferior to the advantageous time-saving state (e.g., a low-probability state and time-saving state A) reaching the upper limit.

For example, during a pattern change, the game control microcomputer 101 may perform the following in this order: (1) a process for storing the number of times time-saving has occurred in response to a special miss (normal time-saving miss, slight time-saving miss), (2) a process for controlling from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state in response to a non-specific number of times reaching the set number of times time-saving has occurred, and (3) a process related to the time-saving determination for determining whether or not to control to the time-saving state in response to a special miss, and the specific timing of each process may be different from that described above.

Also, for example, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 101 has been described as being configured to count both the probability variable counter and the time-saving counter regardless of whether a pattern change related to special symbol 1 or a pattern change related to special symbol 2 occurs. In other words, the game control microcomputer 101 has been described as being configured to end the high-probability state and the time-saving state when the total number of pattern changes related to special symbol 1 and the number of pattern changes related to special symbol 2 reaches their respective upper limit. However, the game control microcomputer 101 may also be configured to end the high-probability state and the time-saving state when the number of pattern changes related to special symbol 2 reaches its upper limit. In other words, in an easy-to-win state in which it is possible to draw special symbol 2, the game control microcomputer 101 may be configured to count the probability variable counter and the time-saving counter only for the pattern change related to special symbol 2. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 may be configured to be able to count the symbol variation associated with special symbol 1 and the symbol variation associated with special symbol 2 separately as a probability variation counter and a time-saving counter. In this case, in a state where it is easy to score a ball and a lottery for special symbol 2 is possible, the value set in the counter for the symbol variation associated with special symbol 1 can be greater than the value set in the counter for the symbol variation associated with special symbol 2. Note that in this embodiment, an example has been described in which the probability variation counter and time-saving counter are used to subtract in response to symbol variation. However, the counting method of various counters such as the probability variation counter and time-saving counter is not limited to subtraction, and addition is also possible.

In addition, in this embodiment, we have described in detail the pachinko gaming machine PY1, which is a so-called "ST machine" among the types of pachinko gaming machines known as "Type 1" or "Digipachi," in which the winning probability is controlled to a high probability state during the ST (Special Time) period. However, the gaming machine may also be a "Type 1" pachinko gaming machine other than an "ST machine." Furthermore, for example, it may also be a so-called "Type 1/Type 2 hybrid" pachinko gaming machine that combines the features of a "Type 1" pachinko gaming machine and the features of a "Type 2" pachinko gaming machine.

10. Third Embodiment Next, a third embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the second embodiment described above is also applied to the third embodiment.

10-1. Operation of the Game Control Microcomputer 101 The operation of the game control microcomputer 101 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Game Status Management Process at End of Special Symbol Variation] The game control microcomputer 101 of this embodiment is capable of executing the game status management process at end of special symbol variation (S1504) shown in FIG. 61. The game status management process at end of special symbol variation (S1504) first determines whether the time-saving flag is ON (S1516). If the time-saving flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1523. If the time-saving flag is ON, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (S1517) and a determination is made as to whether the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (S1518). If the value of the time-saving counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S1523. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1518), the time-saving flag is turned OFF to end the time-saving state (S1519), and the process proceeds to step S1523.

In step S1523, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game status flag update processing. The game status flag update processing (S1523) can be performed as described in the above embodiment.

In this mode, this game state management process (S1504) at the end of special symbol variation controls the transition from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the number of special symbol variations reaches the upper limit of the time-saving count. This control from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state when the number of special symbol variations reaches the upper limit of the time-saving count is performed at the last special symbol variation in the time-saving state. In other words, at the last symbol variation in the time-saving state, the transition to the non-time-saving state occurs when the special symbol variation ends and the special symbol stops.

[Game Status Management Process When Special Symbol is Confirmed] The game control microcomputer 101 of this embodiment is capable of executing the game status management process (S1602) when a special symbol is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 62. In the game status management process (S1602) when a special symbol is confirmed, first, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is OFF (S1701). If the probability variable flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S1706. If the probability variable flag is OFF, it is then determined whether the time-saving flag is OFF (S1702). If the time-saving flag is not OFF, the process proceeds to step S1706. If the time-saving flag is OFF, it is then determined whether the type of losing symbol is a special loss (normal time-saving loss or slight time-saving loss) (S1703). If it is not a special miss (NO in S1703), the process proceeds to step S1706. However, if it is a special miss (YES in S1703), the time-saving flag is turned ON (S1704). This determines whether or not to control to the time-saving state in response to the special miss (time-saving determination). That is, in this embodiment, the time-saving state is set in response to the special miss being stopped and displayed in the non-time-saving state. Also, a predetermined number of time-saving times corresponding to the miss symbol of the special miss is set in the time-saving counter (S1705), and the process proceeds to step S1706. The number of time-saving times set here is the number of time-saving times stored in the time-saving number storage area of the gaming RAM 104 in step S1113 of the special symbol 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or the special symbol 1 jackpot determination process (S1008). The time-saving state and the number of times it is saved set by this process do not correspond to the game state (time-saving state, non-time-saving state) at the time the process is performed, but rather to the game state at the time the special chart 2 jackpot determination process (S1002) or special chart 1 jackpot determination process (S1008) is performed.

Furthermore, by executing steps S1704 and S1705, the game state is controlled to a time-shortened state. The time-shortened state ends when one of the following conditions is met: the special symbol changes a predetermined maximum number of times (time-shortened count), or the next jackpot game is executed. In this way, in this form, the game may be controlled to the time-shortened state even when there is a loss. Note that in this form, control to the time-shortened state based on a loss is limited to when the game is in a low-probability state and not in a time-shortened state (when both steps S1701 and S1702 are YES).

In step S1706, it is determined whether the probability variable flag is ON. If the probability variable flag is not ON, the process proceeds to step S1710. If the probability variable flag is ON, the value of the probability variable counter is decremented by 1 (S1707), and it is determined whether the value of the probability variable counter is "0" (S1708). If the value of the probability variable counter is not "0," the process proceeds to step S1710. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (YES in S1708), the probability variable flag is turned OFF to end the high probability state (S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

Furthermore, in step S1710, the game control microcomputer 101 performs game status flag update processing. The game status flag update processing (S1710) of the game status management processing (S1602) when a special symbol is determined can also be performed as described in the above embodiment.

In this embodiment, the game state management process (S1602) when the special symbol is confirmed controls the game to a time-saving state based on a special miss. The time-saving state based on a special miss is set when the probability variable flag is OFF and the time-saving flag is OFF, but is not set when at least one of the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag is ON. In other words, when the game is already in a high probability state or a time-saving state, the game is not controlled to a time-saving state based on a special miss. However, in this embodiment, the game state management process (S1504) when the special symbol variation ends can be executed before the game state management process (S1602) when the special symbol is confirmed. For this reason, among the pattern changes that start in the low probability state and time-saving state, for the final pattern change (a pattern change that reaches the upper limit of the number of times the time-saving state is executed in the time-saving state) the game state is set to the low probability state and non-time-saving state (probability variable flag and time-saving flag are OFF) before the game state management process (S1602) when the special pattern is confirmed. In other words, for the final pattern change in the low probability state and time-saving state, the time-saving determination is made in the non-time-saving state. For this reason, the game may be controlled to the time-saving state based on a special miss.

On the other hand, in this version, the control from the high probability state to the low probability state is performed after the time-saving determination. Therefore, when in a high probability state, the time-saving determination is made in the high probability state (the probability variable flag is ON) at the final pattern change (the pattern change that reaches the upper limit of the number of times that the high probability state is executed in the high probability state). Therefore, when in a high probability state, the final pattern change does not result in control to the time-saving state based on a special miss.

In this mode, at the start of the high-probability state and time-saving state, the number of times the probability change is set as the value of the probability change counter is the number of time-saving times for the time-saving state that is starting, plus a number equal to or greater than the upper limit of the number of reserved times for Special Chart 2. Specifically, the high-probability state and time-saving state has a time-saving number of 100 times. The upper limit of the number of reserved times for Special Chart 2 is 4. In this mode, the high-probability state and time-saving state has a probability change number of 104 times, which is the number of time-saving times (100 times) plus the upper limit of the number of reserved times for Special Chart 2 (4).

10-2. Game Flow in This Form Next, the game flow in this form of pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be explained based on Figure 63. The pachinko gaming machine PY1 is started with the flags and other settings reset to their initial settings when power is applied via the RAM clear switch 119. That is, when the pachinko gaming machine PY1 is started with the RAM cleared upon power application, the game state is in a non-time-saving state (normal game state). Furthermore, the probability fluctuation function is not activated, resulting in a low-probability state (normal probability state). When this specific power condition is met, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 preferably first plays the game by hitting the ball left-handed to ensure that it enters the first starting slot 11. This is because the low-probability and non-time-saving state makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting slot 12. If the game ball enters the first starting slot 11, a lottery for Special Chart 1 is held, and a jackpot may be won based on this.

In the low-probability state and non-time-saving state, jackpots based on the lottery on Special Chart 1 can be either a V-long jackpot or a V-short jackpot. If a V-long jackpot is won, a 10-round jackpot game is played, followed by control to a high-probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state). For the high-probability state and time-saving state A, the number of chance turns is set to 104, and the number of time-saving turns is set to 100. This state continues until the next jackpot game is played, or until the number of consecutive pattern changes with a losing lottery result (non-specified number of times) equals the number of time-saving turns. In the high-probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state), if the number of consecutive pattern changes with a losing lottery result (non-specified number of times) equals the number of time-saving turns, control is exercised to a high-probability state and non-time-saving state (normal game state). The high probability state and non-time-saving state (normal game state) will continue until the next jackpot game is played or the number of consecutive pattern changes resulting in a losing lottery result (non-specific number of times) reaches the upper limit of the reserved number.

On the other hand, if a V-short jackpot is won, after a 10R jackpot game is played, the game will be controlled to a low probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state). For the low probability state and time-saving state A, the number of time-saving cycles is set to 100. This state will continue until the next jackpot game is played or the number of consecutive pattern changes (non-specific number) that result in a losing lottery result equals the number of time-saving cycles.

On the other hand, the lottery result for Special Chart 1, which is based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11, is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. Furthermore, the lottery result for Special Chart 2, which is based on the ball entering the first starting hole 11, may be a special miss (a regular time-saving miss). If the special miss symbol is miss symbol A (a regular time-saving miss), the number of time-saving cycles is controlled to Time-Saving State C (a regular time-saving state) of 100. Time-Saving State C is a low-probability state.

In the normal time-saving states of high probability and time-saving state A, low probability and time-saving state A, and low probability and time-saving state C, the second starting hole 12 is in a ball-entry-friendly state where the ball frequently enters the hole, so it is preferable to play by hitting with the right hand. If a game ball enters the second starting hole 12 while playing by hitting with the right hand, a lottery for special symbol 2 is held, and a jackpot may be won based on this. A V-long jackpot or V-short jackpot can also be won in the lottery for special symbol 2 in the high probability and time-saving state A, low probability and time-saving state A, and low probability and time-saving state C. Furthermore, in the high probability and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state), the second starting hole 12 is in a ball-entry-friendly state. Therefore, in the high probability and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state), as long as you continue playing correctly by hitting with the right hand, you can normally obtain up to the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 based on balls entering the second starting hole 12. Therefore, in the high probability state and non-time-saving state (normal game state) after the high probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state), a lottery is held to determine the maximum number of reserved special figures 2 obtained in the high probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state).

In pachinko gaming machine PY1, as long as a player continues to win the jackpot in the drawing for Special Chart 2 in Time-Saving State A and Time-Saving State C, the player will continue to enjoy an advantageous state, primarily focused on the drawing for Special Chart 2, without significantly reducing the number of game balls in hand. In other words, the high-probability state and Time-Saving State A, the low-probability state and Time-Saving State A, and the low-probability state and Time-Saving State C are more advantageous gaming states for the player than the non-time-saving state. Furthermore, the jackpot gaming state in which a jackpot game is being played is also more advantageous for the player than the non-time-saving state.

On the other hand, the result of the lottery for Special Chart 2 based on the ball entering the second starting hole 12 is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. In a low-probability state and time-saving state, when there are two or more remaining time-saving attempts, even if the type of miss in the Special Chart 2 lottery result is a special miss, the subsequent game state will not be controlled to the time-saving state, and the number of remaining time-saving attempts will decrease. However, when there is one remaining time-saving attempt, that is, if the result of the last Special Chart 2 lottery in a low-probability state and time-saving state is a special miss, the subsequent game state will be controlled to the time-saving state according to the type of special miss. In this form, the only type of miss that can be drawn in the Special Chart 2 lottery is miss symbol C, which is a slight time-saving miss. Therefore, if the result of the last lottery for Special Chart 2 in the low probability state and time-saving state A, or the low probability state and time-saving state C, is a losing symbol C, the subsequent game state will be controlled to the low probability state and time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state).

Even in a high-probability state and time-saving state, if the type of miss in the Special Chart 2 lottery result is a special miss, the subsequent game state will not be controlled to the time-saving state, and the remaining number of chance modes and the remaining number of time-saving modes will decrease. In a high-probability state and time-saving state, when there is only one time of time-saving remaining, that is, even if the result of the last Special Chart 2 lottery in the high-probability state and time-saving state is a special miss, the subsequent game state will not be controlled to the time-saving state. This is because in the last time in a high-probability state and time-saving state, although it is controlled to the non-time-saving state at the time of the time-saving determination, the high-probability state continues. And if the result of the last Special Chart 2 lottery in the high-probability state and time-saving state is a miss, the subsequent game state will be controlled to the high-probability state and non-time-saving state.

When in a high probability state and non-time-saving state, a lottery is held to determine the maximum number of reserved special symbols 2 obtained in a high probability state and time-saving state A (normal time-saving state). Here too, because the high probability state continues at the time of time-saving determination, even if there is a special miss, the game will not be controlled to the time-saving state and the remaining number of chance modes will decrease. Then, if the result of the last lottery for special symbol 2 in a high probability state and non-time-saving state is a miss, the game state thereafter will be controlled to a low probability state and non-time-saving state.

In addition, in this form, if the result of the lottery for the last special symbol 2 in the low probability state and time-saving state is a losing symbol C (slight time-saving loss), the number of time-saving cycles in the low probability state and time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) controlled accordingly will vary depending on the game state at the start of the pattern change related to the losing symbol C. Specifically, if the game state at the start of the pattern change related to the losing symbol C is a low probability state and time-saving state A, the game will be controlled to a slight time-saving state with 100 time-saving cycles in response to the losing symbol C being displayed stationary. If the game state at the start of the pattern change related to the losing symbol C is a low probability state and time-saving state C, the game will be controlled to a slight time-saving state with 100 time-saving cycles in response to the losing symbol C being displayed stationary.

Time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a state in which it is difficult to score a ball into the second starting hole 12, making it difficult to score a ball. For this reason, it is preferable to play with the left hand in order to aim for the ball to score into the first starting hole 11. If the game is played with the left hand and the game ball scores into the first starting hole 11, a lottery for special chart 1 is held, and based on this, a jackpot may be won. Even in the lottery for special chart 1 in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state), it is possible to win a V-long jackpot or a V-short jackpot.

On the other hand, the lottery result for Special Chart 1 based on a ball entering the first starting hole 11 is more likely to be a miss than a jackpot. Furthermore, the lottery result for Special Chart 1 based on a ball entering the first starting hole 11 in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) may be a special miss. However, when the number of remaining time-saving periods is two or more in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state), even if it is a special miss, the game state is not controlled to the time-saving state based on this, and the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is maintained and the remaining number of time-saving periods continues to be counted. However, when the number of remaining time-saving periods is one, that is, when the lottery result for the last pattern change in time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a special miss, the game state is controlled to time-saving state C (normal time-saving state) according to the missing pattern (missing pattern A (normal time-saving miss)). For this reason, even in this form, if the lottery result for the last symbol change in the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a special miss, it is possible to perform a time-saving entry effect. On the other hand, if the lottery result for the last symbol change in the time-saving state CL (slight time-saving state) is a normal miss, the game will be controlled to a low-probability state and non-time-saving state.

10-3. Main Effects of the Third Embodiment As described in detail above, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to this embodiment determines whether to switch to the time-shortened state in response to a special miss after switching from the time-shortened state to the non-time-shortened state in response to the non-specified number of times in the time-shortened state becoming the time-shortened number. Furthermore, the time-shortened state determination is performed before switching from the high-probability state to the low-probability state in response to the non-specified number of times in the high-probability state becoming the probability variable number. As a result, if the final special drawing in the low-probability and time-shortened state results in a special miss, the machine can transition to the time-shortened state in response to the special miss. However, if the final special drawing in the high-probability and time-shortened state results in a special miss, the machine will not transition to the time-shortened state. This novel gameplay enhances the game's appeal.

Furthermore, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to this embodiment can set the subsequent game state to the short-time-saving state if the result of the special symbol lottery for the final symbol variation initiated in the normal time-saving state is a miss for the short-time-saving state. Because of this configuration, if the result of the special symbol lottery for the final symbol variation in that state is a miss for the short-time-saving state in the low-probability state and normal time-saving state, the subsequent game state will transition to the short-time-saving state. However, even with this configuration, if the result of the special symbol lottery for the final symbol variation in that state is a miss for the short-time-saving state in the high-probability state and normal time-saving state, the game state will not transition to the short-time-saving state even if the result of the special symbol lottery for the final symbol variation in that state is a miss for the short-time-saving state. Thus, while a transition to the short-time-saving state is possible in the low-probability state and normal time-saving state, a transition to a non-time-saving state, which is more advantageous than the short-time-saving state, is possible in the high-probability state and normal time-saving state. For this reason, if a high probability and time-saving state is reached, which is more advantageous than a low probability and time-saving state, even after that state ends, the game can transition to a more advantageous state than the state after the low probability and time-saving state ends. This new gameplay feature can make the game even more entertaining.

The game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to this embodiment can hold the execution of symbol changes up to four times. When controlling to a high probability state and time-saving state, the value of the probability change counter, which is set as the upper limit of the high probability state, is set to the value of the time-saving counter, which is set as the upper limit of the time-saving state, plus 4, which is the upper limit of the number of holds. This makes it possible to transition to a low probability state and time-saving state even in a configuration where the execution of symbol changes can be held.

10-4. Modifications of the Third Embodiment Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. In the description of the modifications, the same components as those of the above embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components of the modifications may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in this embodiment and the following modifications may be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

For example, in this embodiment, the number of reserved special symbols 2 that the game control microcomputer 101 can reserve has been described as four. However, the number of reserved symbols can be changed as appropriate. For example, when controlling to a high probability state and a time-saving state, the high probability upper limit number of times set for the high probability state can be set to the upper limit number of time-saving times set for the time-saving state plus a number equal to or greater than the upper limit for the number of reserved symbols. This is because control to a low probability state and a time-saving state remains possible. For example, the game control microcomputer 101 can also be configured not to reserve special symbols 2. In this case, when controlling to a high probability state and a time-saving state, the high probability upper limit number of times set for the high probability state (the value set in the probability variable counter) can be set to the same value as the upper limit number of time-saving times set for the time-saving state (the value set in the time-saving counter).

For example, during a pattern change, the game control microcomputer 101 may perform the following in this order: (1) a process for controlling from a time-shortened state to a non-time-shortened state in response to the non-specific number of times reaching the set number of time-shortened states; (2) a process related to a time-shortened state determination that determines whether or not to control to a time-shortened state in response to a special miss; and (3) a process for controlling from a high-probability state to a low-probability state in response to the non-specific number of times reaching the set number of probability-changed states; and the specific timing of each process may be different from that described above.

11. Fourth Embodiment Next, a fourth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above is also applied to the fourth embodiment.

11-1. Operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 The operation of the performance control microcomputer 121 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

[Prize Ball-Related Processing] The presentation control microcomputer 121 in this embodiment can execute the prize ball-related processing (S4417) shown in FIG. 64. The prize ball-related processing (S4417) first calculates the number of unpaid prize balls (S4701). Unpaid prize balls are those balls that have entered a prize slot and been detected by a sensor attached to the prize slot, fulfilling the prize ball conditions, thereby earning the right to win prize balls, but have not yet been paid out. The number of prize balls corresponding to each prize slot, such as the first large prize slot 14, is predetermined. The number of prize balls may differ for each prize slot. Unpaid prize balls may occur because it takes time for the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball conditions to be actually paid out after the prize ball conditions are fulfilled. Specifically, unpaid prize balls occur when a prize ball condition is fulfilled that exceeds the payout capacity per unit time of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. This can also occur, for example, when a problem (such as a jam of game balls) occurs in the mechanism for paying out prize balls. For example, if a machine has an upper tray upper limit sensor capable of detecting the upper limit of the upper tray 34 and stops paying out game balls when the upper tray upper limit sensor detects a game ball, this can result in unpaid prize balls. The number of unpaid prize balls can be calculated, for example, by subtracting the number of paid-out prize balls from the cumulative number of prize balls. The presentation control microcomputer 121 can determine the number of prize balls from the prize ball command received from the game control microcomputer 101. The prize ball command may include, for example, information indicating the number of prize balls and information regarding which prize slot the prize ball corresponds to (e.g., first large prize slot 14). The presentation control microcomputer 121 can also determine the number of paid-out prize balls from the payout command received from the game control microcomputer 101. The payout command includes information such as the number of game balls actually paid out, as detected by the prize ball sensor 73a.

Next, it is determined whether the number of unpaid balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined display reference number (S4702). If it is equal to or greater than the display reference number (YES in S4702), it is determined whether the presentation mode is the ground background mode (S4703). As mentioned above, the ground background mode is the presentation mode that is set when the ball is not easy to score. If the presentation mode is the ground background mode (YES in S4703), an unpaid indicator display is displayed (S4704), and this processing ends. In other words, an unpaid indicator display command for displaying the unpaid indicator display is set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124. When the unpaid indicator display command is sent to the image control board 140, the unpaid indicator display is displayed. The unpaid indicator display is an image that indicates at least one of the remaining time until the unpaid balls are paid out and the number of unpaid balls.

If the number of unpaid balls is less than the predetermined display standard number (NO in S4702) or the presentation mode is not the ground background mode (NO in S4703), it is determined whether the unpaid indicator display is currently being displayed (S4705). If the unpaid indicator display is not currently being displayed (NO in S4705), this process ends. However, if it is currently being displayed (S4705), it is determined whether the number of unpaid balls is "0" (S4706). If the number of unpaid balls is not "0" (NO in S4706), this process ends. However, if the number of unpaid balls is "0," the unpaid indicator display is hidden (S4707). In other words, an unpaid indicator clear command to hide the unpaid indicator display is set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124. When the unpaid indicator clear command is sent to the image control board 140, the unpaid indicator display is hidden. Furthermore, a payout completion display is displayed (S4708), and this process ends. That is, a payout completion display command for displaying the payout completion display is set in the output buffer of the presentation RAM 124. When the payout completion display command is sent to the image control board 140, the payout completion display is displayed. The payout completion display is a display that suggests that the payout of any unpaid winning balls that existed up to that point has been completed. In this embodiment, the payout completion display is displayed for a predetermined period of time, and then is hidden.

11-2. Examples of Effects in This Mode 11-2-1. Unpaid Indicator Effects Next, examples of effects in the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this mode will be described with reference to Figures 65 and 66. First, the unpaid indicator effects will be described.

The unpaid indicator effect is an effect that may be executed when there are unpaid balls. Figure 65 shows the display unit 50a when there are unpaid balls and the unpaid indicator effect is being performed. In the unpaid indicator effect, the unpaid indicator display GA is displayed. The unpaid indicator display GA in this embodiment includes a "Paying Out" display, indicating that the conditions for paying out prize balls have been met by winning a prize ball in a prize slot (e.g., the first large prize slot 14, etc.), but the unpaid prize balls are in the process of being paid out. The unpaid indicator display GA also includes a display showing the number of unpaid prize balls. The unpaid indicator display GA also includes a display showing the time required for all unpaid prize balls to be paid out. The time required for all unpaid prize balls to be paid out can be calculated, for example, from the number of unpaid prize balls and the number of game balls paid out per unit time by the prize ball payout device 73.

Therefore, by displaying the unpaid indicator display GA, the player can know that there are unpaid balls. Furthermore, the unpaid indicator display GA allows the player to know how many unpaid balls remain. In addition, the unpaid indicator display GA allows the player to know how much time is left until the unpaid balls are paid out.

11-2-2. Payout completion effect

Next, the payout completion effect will be explained. The payout completion effect is an effect that may be executed when all unpaid prize balls have been paid out. Figure 66 shows the display unit 50a when the payout completion effect is being performed. In the payout completion effect, a payout completion display GB is displayed. The payout completion display GB in this embodiment includes the display "Payout Completed," which indicates that all existing unpaid prize balls have been paid out.

The payout completion effect begins when all unpaid balls have been paid out after the unpaid indicator effect has started. The payout completion display GB associated with the payout completion effect lets the player know that all unpaid balls have been paid out.

11-3. Main Effects of the Fourth Embodiment As described above in detail, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 according to this embodiment can execute a payout control process to cause the payout control board 170 to pay out a number of game balls as prize balls based on the establishment of a prize ball condition due to a game ball entering a prize slot (such as the first large prize slot 14). The presentation control microcomputer 121 executes an unpaid indicator presentation when there are unpaid balls. In the unpaid indicator presentation, an unpaid indicator display GA is displayed on the display unit 50a. The unpaid indicator display GA includes a display indicating the number of unpaid balls and a display indicating the time required for all unpaid balls to be paid out. This prevents players from feeling stressed due to not knowing how many unpaid balls remain. In other words, it prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, the effect control microcomputer 121 in this embodiment initiates the unpaid indicator effect when the number of unpaid balls is equal to or greater than the display reference number, which is the benchmark. On the other hand, it does not initiate the effect when the number of unpaid balls is less than the display reference number. In other words, the effect control microcomputer 121 executes the unpaid indicator effect when the execution conditions (i.e., the display conditions for the unpaid indicator display GA) are met, and one of the elemental conditions for meeting these execution conditions is that the number of unpaid balls is equal to or greater than the display reference number. This means that the effect will not be executed when there are few unpaid balls, but can be executed when there are many unpaid balls. Therefore, when there are many unpaid balls and it will take time to pay them out, the player's stress can be appropriately alleviated by displaying the estimated time until completion.

The effect control microcomputer 121 in this embodiment can initiate the unpaid indicator effect when a state advantageous to the player, primarily based on the lottery of Special Chart 2, in which a jackpot game state can be frequently executed, ends and a slight time-saving state begins. On the other hand, in a state advantageous to the player, primarily based on the lottery of Special Chart 2, the unpaid indicator effect is not executed. In other words, the elemental conditions for the effect control microcomputer 121 to execute the unpaid indicator effect are met, including the end of a bonus game state advantageous to the player, primarily based on the lottery of Special Chart 2, and the transition to a non-bonus game state. Players tend to end play when an advantageous bonus game state ends. In contrast, in a bonus game state, players are less likely to end play. Furthermore, this configuration can help players reliably collect unpaid balls by displaying the estimated time remaining for the payout of unpaid balls when they end play. Additionally, by displaying the estimated time remaining until unpaid balls are paid out, it is possible to alleviate the stress of players waiting for that time to occur.

11-4. Modifications of the Fourth Embodiment Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. In the description of the modifications, the same components as those of the above embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components of the modifications may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in this embodiment and the following modifications may be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

For example, in this embodiment, a specific example of the unpaid ball indicator display GA has been shown and described in FIG. 65. However, the specific example of the unpaid ball indicator display GA is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 65. For example, the unpaid ball indicator display GA may be an image capable of indicating at least one of the remaining time until the unpaid balls are paid out and the number of unpaid balls. Alternatively, for example, the example shown in FIG. 67 may be used. That is, FIG. 67(A) shows an unpaid ball indicator display GA in the form of a gauge. The unpaid ball indicator display GA shown in FIG. 67(A) is a progress bar whose decrease indicates the payout of unpaid balls. When the payout of unpaid balls is complete, a payout completion display GB indicating the completion of payout may be displayed, as shown in FIG. 67(B). Alternatively, for example, the unpaid ball indicator display GA in the form of a gauge may indicate the payout of unpaid balls whose increase indicates the payout of unpaid balls. Also, for example, if the unpaid ball indicator GA is displayed so that the player can know that the unpaid balls have been paid out, the payout completion indicator GB does not necessarily have to be displayed.

In this embodiment, the unpaid indicator effect is described as being executed when the number of unpaid prize balls is equal to or greater than the display reference number. That is, the configuration has been described in which the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect is met when the number of unpaid prize balls is equal to or greater than the display reference number. However, for example, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or the element condition for the execution condition to be met) may be met by the cumulative number of prize balls based on the met prize ball condition. Specifically, for example, a prize ball counter that counts the number of prize balls in a specific section may be provided, and the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or its element condition) may be met when the count value of the prize ball counter reaches or exceeds a predetermined reference number. The specific section can be made advantageous for players who primarily rely on the lottery for special chart 2. That is, for example, after playing in the slightly time-saving mode (i.e., after entering the non-bonus game mode), the number of prize balls can be counted starting from the start of the jackpot game mode (initial jackpot game mode) when the first jackpot is won, and then, after continuing in a state advantageous to the player that focuses on the lottery for special chart 2 without going through the non-bonus game mode (i.e., the bonus game mode), if the count value reaches or exceeds a reference value until this state ends and the game transitions to the non-bonus game mode, an unpaid indicator effect can be displayed.

Also, for example, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or an element condition thereof) may be met when the number of times a jackpot game state is reached in a state advantageous to the player, primarily based on the lottery of special chart 2 (the so-called number of consecutive wins) is equal to or exceeds a predetermined reference number. Specifically, for example, a consecutive win counter may be provided that counts the number of jackpot game states during the period from the transition from a non-bonus game state to a bonus game state (e.g., a normal time-saving state) until the bonus game state ends and the non-bonus game state begins again, and the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or an element condition thereof) may be met when the count value of the consecutive win counter is equal to or exceeds the reference number of consecutive wins.

Furthermore, for example, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or an element condition thereof) may be met when the time during which payout has been stopped despite the existence of unpaid prize balls exceeds a predetermined time. Specifically, for example, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or an element condition thereof) may be met when no game balls are detected by the prize ball sensor 73a for a certain period of time while unpaid prize balls are present.

In this embodiment, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect is described as being met when a state advantageous to the player, primarily focused on the drawing of the special symbol 2, ends and the game transitions to a non-time-saving state. However, for example, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or its component conditions) may be met regardless of the game state. In other words, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect may be met simply when the number of unpaid prize balls reaches or exceeds the display reference number. As a result, when the number of unpaid prize balls reaches or exceeds the display reference number, the unpaid indicator effect can be initiated even during a state advantageous to the player, primarily focused on the drawing of the special symbol 2 (during a jackpot game state or a normal time-saving game state). Furthermore, when the unpaid indicator effect is initiated during a state advantageous to the player, primarily focused on the drawing of the special symbol 2, it may be initiated immediately before the end of that state. Specifically, for example, when the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect (or its component conditions) is initiated during a jackpot game state, it can be met according to the ending effect. For example, if an unpaid indicator effect is initiated during the normal time-saving mode, it can be initiated during the final symbol change (the symbol change that reaches the time-saving count) initiated during the normal time-saving mode. For example, the execution condition (or its element condition) of the unpaid indicator effect may be satisfied when payout is stopped despite the presence of unpaid balls, even if the number of unpaid balls is less than the display reference number. Specifically, for example, when payout is stopped due to detection by the upper tray upper limit sensor (or lower tray full switch) when there are unpaid balls less than the display reference number, or when a payout is impossible due to ball jamming, the execution condition (or its element condition) of the unpaid indicator effect may be satisfied. This is because it is possible to prevent a player from ending play on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 with unpaid balls remaining. The same applies when the execution condition (or its element condition) of the unpaid indicator effect is satisfied depending on the cumulative number of prize balls or the number of consecutive wins. The same applies when the conditions for executing the unpaid indicator effect are met based on the cumulative number of winning balls or the number of consecutive wins.

Furthermore, each of the element conditions described in this embodiment as one of the elements for establishing the execution conditions for the unpaid indicator effect may be established when one of the element conditions is established. Alternatively, the execution conditions for the unpaid indicator effect may be established when multiple element conditions are established. Furthermore, for example, it is possible to set different execution conditions (or element conditions) for the unpaid indicator effect depending on the game state. Specifically, in the above embodiment, an example was described in which the first element condition is established when the number of unpaid prize balls is equal to or greater than the display reference number, the second element condition is established when the bonus game state advantageous to the player, which mainly relies on the lottery for special chart 2, ends and the game enters a non-bonus game state, and the execution conditions for the unpaid indicator effect are established when both the first and second element conditions are established. However, for example, during a jackpot gaming state and a bonus gaming state, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect may be met when the first element condition is met, and in a non-bonus gaming state after the bonus gaming state has ended, the execution condition for the unpaid indicator effect may be met when the second element condition is met by entering a non-bonus gaming state. In this way, if the number of unpaid balls during the bonus gaming state exceeds the display reference number, the unpaid indicator effect may be started immediately, and even if the number of unpaid balls during the bonus gaming state remains below the display reference number, the unpaid indicator effect may be started when the bonus gaming state ends.

In this embodiment, the payout completion effect has been described as being initiated upon the end of the unpaid indicator effect (i.e., upon the number of unpaid balls reaching zero). However, for example, the payout completion effect may not be executed if the unpaid indicator effect ends during a bonus game state, but may be executed if the unpaid indicator effect ends after the game enters a non-bonus game state. For example, the payout completion effect may be executed only if the execution time of the unpaid indicator effect after the game enters a non-bonus game state exceeds a predetermined time. For example, the payout completion effect may be executed only if the time during which payout has been stopped despite the existence of unpaid balls exceeds a predetermined time.

In this embodiment, for example, an example in which an unpaid indicator effect is performed on the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment has been described. However, for example, the unpaid indicator effect of this embodiment can also be performed on pachinko gaming machine PY1 of other embodiments. Also, a non-time-saving state may be included in the non-bonus game state. Furthermore, for example, the number of prize balls and the number of payouts used to calculate the unpaid prize balls preferably include at least the number of prize balls and the number of payouts corresponding to winnings in the large prize winning slots (first large prize winning slot 14, second large prize winning slot 15), but may not include the number of prize balls and the number of payouts corresponding to winnings in the first start winning slot 11, second start winning slot 12, and general prize winning slot 10.

12. Fifth Embodiment Next, a fifth embodiment of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 will be described. Unless otherwise stated, the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of the first embodiment described above is also applied to the fifth embodiment.

First, we will explain the performance unit 1U of this embodiment. As shown in Figure 68, the performance unit 1U of this embodiment is equipped with an image display device 50, an above-board movable device 55, and an below-board movable device 56. The image display device 50 and above-board movable device 55 in this embodiment are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In this embodiment, the under-board movable device 56 is configured to be movable along the display unit 50a and includes two decorated under-board movable bodies. Specifically, it includes a first under-board movable body 56KA and a second under-board movable body 56KB. Figure 68 shows a schematic representation of the above-board movable body 55k, the first below-board movable body 56KA, and the second below-board movable body 56KB all held in a normal standby state (initial position) where they are not in operation. In other words, none of the above-board movable body 55k, the first below-board movable body 56KA, and the second below-board movable body 56KB are in an operating state. When the drive source of the above-board movable device 55 is activated, the above-board movable body 55k moves downward (descends), as shown in Figure 69. The under-board movable device 56 has a drive source for each of the first under-board movable body 56KA and the second under-board movable body 56KB, and when these drive sources are driven, the first under-board movable body 56KA and the second under-board movable body 56KB move upward (rise) as shown in Figure 69.

In this embodiment, the under-board movable device 56 has a drive source for each of the first under-board movable body 56KA and the second under-board movable body 56KB, so it is possible to operate the first under-board movable body 56KA and the second under-board movable body 56KB individually. That is, for example, as shown in FIG. 70, the under-board movable device 56 in this embodiment can operate the first under-board movable body 56KA while holding the second under-board movable body 56KB in a standby state. Conversely, for example, it is also possible to operate the second under-board movable body 56KB while holding the first under-board movable body 56KA in a standby state.

Next, we will explain the special chart 1 variation patterns that can be executed by the game control microcomputer 101. The game ROM 103 stores the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 71. The game control microcomputer 101 can determine the special chart 1 variation pattern using the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 71. In this embodiment, the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 71 is used, but it is also possible to use it in conjunction with the special chart 1 variation pattern determination table shown in Figure 11, for example.

In the special chart 1 variation pattern determination process in the non-time-saving state, the game control microcomputer 101 determines the special chart 1 variation pattern based on the results of the jackpot determination, the reach determination, and the special chart variation pattern random number. As shown in FIG. 71, the game control microcomputer 101 can determine eight types of special chart 1 variation patterns: "THP001" to "THP003," "THP011" to "THP013," and "THP021" to "THP022." Which special chart 1 variation pattern is determined depends on the special chart variation pattern random number.

Specifically, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," one of three special chart 1 variation patterns, "THP001" to "THP003," will be determined. Of the three special chart 1 variation patterns, "THP001" is more likely to be determined than the other special chart 1 variation patterns. "THP001" is called the "battle jackpot variation," "THP002" is called the "character jackpot variation," and "THP003" is called the "N jackpot variation."

Also, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and the result of the reach determination is "reach," one of the three special chart 1 variation patterns, "THP011" to "THP013," will be determined. Of the three special chart 1 variation patterns, "THP013" is more likely to be determined than the other special chart 1 variation patterns. "THP011" is called a "battle miss variation," "THP012" is called a "character miss variation," and "THP013" is called an "N miss variation."

Also, if the result of the jackpot determination is a "miss" and the result of the reach determination is a "no reach," one of two types of special chart 1 variation patterns, "THP021" to "THP022," will be determined. Which of the two types of special chart 1 variation patterns is determined varies depending on the number of special chart 1 reserved. When the number of special chart 1 reserved is 0 to 2, "THP021," which has a relatively long special chart variation time of 10,000 ms, is likely to be determined, while when the number of special chart 1 reserved is 3 to 4, "THP022," which has a relatively short special chart variation time of 4,000 ms, is likely to be determined. Note that "THP021" is called the "normal A miss variation," and "THP022" is called the "normal B miss variation."

Next, using Figure 72, we will explain the special chart variation effects that the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute in accordance with the special chart 1 variation pattern determined by the game control microcomputer 101. The effect control microcomputer 121 can execute the following effects ("normal variation," "N reach," "character reach," "battle reach," "start-up activation effect," "development effect," etc.) in the special chart variation effects when the time is not reduced.

A. Normal fluctuation "Normal fluctuation" is a performance that may occur in response to the start of the variable display of the special chart, and is a performance in which the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 change and display. Since "normal fluctuation" is the first to occur in the special chart fluctuation performance, it functions as a performance that suggests that the special chart fluctuation performance has started.

B. Reach A "reach" is an effect that may occur after a "normal variation." It is an effect in which the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 stop and display the same type of effect pattern. In this embodiment, it is also called a "reach formation effect." A "reach" may occur when the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," and therefore functions as an effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game. Furthermore, a "reach" may subsequently develop into a reach effect such as a "battle reach," and therefore also functions as an effect suggesting the possibility of a reach effect. Furthermore, in this embodiment, a reach line may be displayed in response to the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 being displayed in a stopped state of the same type of effect pattern. As a result, the reach line in this embodiment has the function of indicating that a reach has been formed. Furthermore, it is possible to display multiple types of reach lines. This point will be described in detail later. In addition, the stopping mode of the performance pattern in a "reach" may be a permanent stop, which indicates that the performance pattern related to the formation of the reach has reached its final stopped state with that type of pattern, or it may be a temporary stop that can be changed again afterwards.

C. N Reach "N Reach" is an effect that may occur after a "reach" is established, and is a reach effect in which the fluctuation speed of the middle effect symbol EZ2 gradually slows down. "N Reach" may occur when the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," so it functions as an effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game.

D. Character Reach A "character reach" is an effect that may occur after an "N reach," in which a character (for example, the main character) challenges a predetermined mission. A "character reach" is more likely to occur when the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" than when the result is a "miss," and therefore functions as an effect that suggests a high possibility of a jackpot game.

In "Character Reach", "Character Presentation" and "Win/Loss Presentation" are performed in this order. In the "Character Presentation", a video is shown of a character taking on a mission. The "Win/Loss Presentation" is a presentation that shows whether the character has succeeded in the mission they attempted. In the "Win/Loss Presentation", if the result of the jackpot determination is "Win", it shows that the character will succeed in the mission challenge, and if it is "Loss", it shows that the character will fail the mission challenge.

E. Battle Reach A "battle reach" is one of the SP reach effects that can occur after an "N reach," and is a reach effect in which a "battle effect" is performed in which the main character battles an enemy character. A "battle reach" is more likely to occur when the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" than when the result is a "miss," and therefore functions as an effect suggesting that a jackpot game is more likely to occur. Furthermore, a jackpot game is more likely to occur when an "N reach" develops into a "battle reach" than when an "N reach" develops into a "character reach," and therefore a "battle reach" also functions as an effect suggesting that a jackpot game is more likely to occur than a "character reach."

In "Battle Reach," a "Battle Presentation" and a "Win/Loss Presentation" are performed in this order. In the "Battle Presentation," a video showing a battle between the main character and the enemy character progresses. The "Win/Loss Presentation" is a presentation that shows whether the main character has defeated the enemy character. In the "Win/Loss Presentation," if the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot," it shows the main character winning, and if the result is a "loss," it shows the main character losing.

F. Start-up Activation Effects "Start-up activation effects" are effects that may be executed in response to the start of the special chart variation effects. "Start-up activation effects" are more likely to occur when the result of the jackpot determination is a "jackpot" compared to when the result is a "miss," and therefore function as an effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game. The "start-up activation effects" of this embodiment are effects in which at least one of the above-board movable body 55k, the first below-board movable body 56KA, and the second below-board movable body 56KB is activated. The likelihood of a subsequent jackpot game being played varies depending on which of the above-board movable body 55k, the first below-board movable body 56KA, and the second below-board movable body 56KB is activated. This point will be described in more detail later.

G. Development Effects The "development effects" are effects that may occur after an "N Reach" and before the initiation of a "Chara Reach" or "Battle Reach." Therefore, the "development effects" function as effects indicating that an "N Reach" will develop into an effect that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot. In this form of "development effect," images suggesting each of the "Chara Reach" and "Battle Reach" as potential developments are displayed. Furthermore, while images suggesting each of the "Chara Reach" and "Battle Reach" as potential developments are displayed, an "operation prompt effect" is performed. In the "operation prompt effect," an operation valid period for the normal button 40 is set, and the player is prompted to operate the normal button 40. Depending on whether the normal button 40 is operated within the operation valid period, the development to either the "Chara Reach" or the "Battle Reach" is suggested. If the operation valid period elapses without the normal button 40 being operated, the development to that development is suggested in response to the expiration of the operation valid period. In this case, the suggestion of the development destination can be made in the same manner as when the normal button 40 is operated within the valid operation period.

Next, using Figure 72, we will explain the presentation flow for the main special chart variation presentations that are executed in the non-time-saving state. The presentation control microcomputer 121 displays presentation images on the display unit 50a for each presentation that makes up the presentation flow. In addition, depending on the presentation image displayed on the display unit 50a, it is possible to execute light-emitting presentations using the frame lamps 53 and board lamps 54, sound presentations using the speaker 52, etc.

In this form, the general term for the special chart change effects of the special chart 1 change patterns "battle jackpot change" and "battle miss change" is battle reach change (Figure 72 (A)), the general term for the special chart change effects of "character jackpot change" and "character miss change" is character reach change (Figure 72 (B)), and the general term for the special chart change effects of "N jackpot change" and "N miss change" is "N reach change" (Figure 72 (C)).

As shown in Figure 72 (A), in a battle reach variation, a presentation flow consisting of "normal variation" → "reach" → "N reach" → "development effect" → "battle reach" is executed. The presentation time for the "normal variation" is 10 seconds, the presentation time for the "reach" is 5 seconds, the presentation time for the "N reach" is 10 seconds, the presentation time for the "development effect" is 5 seconds, and the presentation time for the "battle reach" is 40 seconds. These constituent presentations make up a battle reach variation with a special chart variation time of 70 seconds (70,000 ms). Furthermore, in a "battle reach", the "battle presentation" → "win/lose presentation" are performed in this order. In a "battle reach", the presentation time for the "battle presentation" is 35 seconds, and the presentation time for the "win/lose presentation" is 5 seconds. Note that in the "win/lose presentation" of a "battle jackpot variation", each presentation pattern EZ1, EZ2, EZ3 is displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot (for example, a doublet). On the other hand, in the "Win/Loss Effect" of the "Battle Loss Variation," the effect symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner that suggests a loss (for example, a spread pattern).

As shown in Figure 72 (B), in a character reach variation, a presentation flow consisting of "normal variation" → "reach" → "N reach" → "development presentation" → "character reach" is executed. The presentation time for a "normal variation" is 10 seconds, that for a "reach" is 5 seconds, that for an "N reach" is 10 seconds, that for a "development presentation" is 5 seconds, and that for a "character reach" is 20 seconds. These constituent presentations make up a character reach variation with a special chart variation time of 50 seconds (50,000 ms). In the "win/lose presentation" of a "character jackpot variation," the presentation symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot (for example, a double number). On the other hand, in the "win/lose presentation" of a "character loss variation," the presentation symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a loss (for example, a random number).

In the N Reach variation, as shown in Figure 72 (C), a presentation flow consisting of "normal variation" → "reach" → "N reach" is executed. The presentation time for "normal variation" is 10 seconds, that for "reach" is 5 seconds, and that for "N reach" is 10 seconds. These constituent presentations make up an N Reach variation with a special pattern variation time of 25 seconds (25,000 ms). At the end of the "N reach" of the "N jackpot variation," the presentation symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a jackpot (for example, a double number). On the other hand, at the end of the "N reach" of the "N loss variation," the presentation symbols EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3 are displayed stopped in a manner suggesting a loss (for example, a spread number).

Furthermore, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is a "normal A miss variation" special chart variation effect, a presentation flow consisting of only "normal variation" is executed, as shown in Figure 72 (D). Even in "normal variation," the result of the jackpot determination is shown by the stopped display of each of the performance patterns EZ1, EZ2, and EZ3.

Next, the "start-up activation effect" will be explained in detail. Figure 73 shows the start-up activation effect selection table for this embodiment. As shown in Figure 73, there are multiple patterns for the start-up activation effect. Using the start-up activation effect selection table, the effect control microcomputer 121 can select whether or not to execute the "start-up activation effect," and if so, which of the multiple patterns to execute.

The effect control microcomputer 121 can select the "start-up activation effect" by referring to the special chart 1 variation pattern. Specifically, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is "battle jackpot variation" (THP001), "character jackpot variation" (THP002), or "N jackpot variation" (THP003), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the execution of the "start-up activation effect" 95% of the time and the non-execution of the "start-up activation effect" 5% of the time. Furthermore, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is "battle jackpot variation" (THP001), "character jackpot variation" (THP002), or "N jackpot variation" (THP003), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the execution of the first activation effect 44% of the time, the second activation effect 29% of the time, the third activation effect 8% of the time, the fourth activation effect 7% of the time, the fifth activation effect 4% of the time, and the sixth activation effect 3% of the time, respectively, as the "start-up activation effect."

When the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Battle Miss Variation" (THP011), "Character Miss Variation" (THP012), or "N Miss Variation" (THP013), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the execution of the "start-up activation effect" 70% of the time and the non-execution of the "start-up activation effect" 30% of the time. Furthermore, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Battle Miss Variation" (THP011), "Character Miss Variation" (THP012), or "N Miss Variation" (THP013), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the execution of the first activation effect 1% of the time, the second activation effect 10% of the time, the third activation effect 15% of the time, the fourth activation effect 14% of the time, the fifth activation effect 15% of the time, and the sixth activation effect 15% of the time.

When the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Normal A Miss Variation" (THP021) or "Normal B Miss Variation" (THP022), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the execution of the "start-up activation effect" 4% of the time and the non-execution of the "start-up activation effect" 96% of the time. Furthermore, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Normal A Miss Variation" (THP021) or "Normal B Miss Variation" (THP022), the effect control microcomputer 121 selects the execution of the fifth activation effect 2% of the time and the execution of the sixth activation effect 2% of the time as the "start-up activation effect."

In other words, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is a "battle jackpot variation," "character jackpot variation," or "N jackpot variation" related to a jackpot, the "start-up activation effect" is likely to be selected in the following order: 1st activation effect > 2nd activation effect > 3rd activation effect > 4th activation effect > 5th activation effect > 6th activation effect. On the other hand, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is related to a miss, the likelihood of selecting the "start-up activation effect" pattern tends to be roughly the opposite of when the special chart 1 variation pattern is related to a jackpot. For this reason, each "start-up activation effect" pattern functions as an effect suggesting a high possibility of a jackpot, in the order: 1st activation effect > 2nd activation effect > 3rd activation effect > 4th activation effect > 5th activation effect > 6th activation effect. The selection ratio indicated by the start-up activation effect selection table shown in Figure 73 can also be changed as appropriate.

In addition, the column for each pattern in the start-time activation effect selection table lists the movable body that will be activated in that pattern. That is, in the first activation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 changes the above-board movable body 55k, the first below-board movable body 56KA, and the second below-board movable body 56KB from a standby state to an activated state (see Figure 69). In the second activation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 changes the above-board movable body 55k from a standby state to an activated state. In the second activation effect, the first below-board movable body 56KA and the second below-board movable body 56KB are maintained in a standby state. In the third activation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 changes the above-board movable body 55k and the first below-board movable body 56KA from a standby state to an activated state. In the third activation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 changes the above-board movable body 55k and the first below-board movable body 56KA from a standby state to an activated state. In the third activation effect, the second below-board movable body 56KB is maintained in a standby state. In the fourth operation performance, the operation control microcomputer 121 changes the first under-board movable body 56KA from a standby state to an operating state. In the fourth operation performance, the above-board movable body 55k and the second below-board movable body 56KB are maintained in a standby state. In the fifth operation performance, the operation control microcomputer 121 changes the above-board movable body 55k and the second below-board movable body 56KB from a standby state to an operating state. In the fifth operation performance, the first below-board movable body 56KA is maintained in a standby state. In the sixth operation performance, the operation control microcomputer 121 changes the second below-board movable body 56KB from a standby state to an operating state. In the sixth operation performance, the above-board movable body 55k and the first below-board movable body 56KA are maintained in a standby state. After the start operation performance, the operation control microcomputer 121 changes the movable bodies that were set to an operating state to a standby state.

In other words, in this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the second operation effect, in which the first below-board movable body 56KA associated with the below-board movable device 56 is not activated but the above-board movable body 55k associated with the above-board movable device 55 is activated, is higher than the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the third operation effect, in which the above-board movable body 55k, which is the movable body associated with the above-board movable device 55, and the first below-board movable body 56KA, which is the movable body associated with the below-board movable device 56, are activated. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the second operation effect is higher than the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the fifth operation effect, in which the above-board movable body 55k, which is the movable body associated with the above-board movable device 55, and the second below-board movable body 56KB, which is the movable body associated with the below-board movable device 56, are activated.

Generally, in gaming machines equipped with multiple moving bodies, the more moving bodies that are in an operating state, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot. Physical moving bodies can create an impressive effect when they are activated, accompanied not only by visual appearance but also by realistic sounds and vibrations. The more moving bodies that are activated, the more impressive the effect tends to be.

In contrast, in the start-up operation presentation of this form, the more movable bodies that are activated, the higher the suggested likelihood of a jackpot. For this reason, in the start-up operation presentation of this form, it is important to know which movable bodies are activated in order to accurately grasp the suggested likelihood of a jackpot. In other words, in the start-up operation presentation of this form, the new interest is provided by distinguishing not only the simple number of movable bodies that are activated, but also which movable bodies have been activated, and grasping the suggested likelihood of a jackpot. Furthermore, it is possible to make on-board movable body 55k function as a special movable body that can suggest a high likelihood of a jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the fourth operation effect, in which the above-board movable body 55k of the above-board movable device 55 is not activated and the first below-board movable body 56KA of the below-board movable device 56 is activated, is lower than the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the third operation effect. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the sixth operation effect, in which the above-board movable body 55k of the above-board movable device 55 is not activated and the second below-board movable body 56KB of the below-board movable device 56 is activated, is lower than the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the fifth operation effect. In other words, in the relationship between the third and fourth operation effects, and the relationship between the fifth and sixth operation effects, the greater the number of activated movable bodies, the higher the likelihood of a jackpot, and players can easily grasp the likelihood of a jackpot based on the number of activated movable bodies.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the first operational effect, in which the above-board movable body 55k of the above-board movable device 55, and the first below-board movable body 56KA and second below-board movable body 56KB of the below-board movable device 56 are all in an operational state, is higher than the likelihood of a jackpot suggested by the second operational effect. As a result, the impressive first operational effect, which involves the operation of three movable bodies, can sufficiently heighten the player's anticipation of a jackpot.

Furthermore, in the second operation presentation of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74, the second operation presentation display G55 can be displayed on the display unit 50a. The second operation presentation display G55 is displayed when the on-board movable body 55k in the second operation presentation enters an operating state. The displayed second operation presentation display G55 is then hidden when the on-board movable body 55k enters a standby state. The second operation presentation display G55 can then be used to create a powerful second operation presentation, even when the first under-board movable body 56KA and the second under-board movable body 56KB are not in an operating state. It is preferable not to display the second operation presentation display G55 in the third, fourth, fifth, and sixth operation presentations. This is because the second operation presentation display G55 can fully function as a display suggesting a high probability of a jackpot. On the other hand, the second operation presentation display G55 may be displayed in the first operation presentation. This is because the second operation effect display G55 can function as a display that is closely related to the operation of the on-board movable body 55k, while also functioning as a display that suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot. The second operation effect display G55 shown in Figure 74 is merely an example and can be modified as appropriate.

Next, the reach lines in the "reach formation effect" will be explained in detail. Figure 75 shows the reach line selection table for this embodiment. As shown in Figure 75, there are multiple reach line patterns. The effect control microcomputer 121 can use the reach line selection table to select whether or not to display reach lines, and, if a reach line is to be displayed, which of the multiple patterns to display. Reach line patterns include normal and special modes. Note that in this embodiment, a "reach formation effect" in which a reach line is displayed is sometimes referred to as a line-display reach formation effect. A "reach formation effect" in which a reach line is not displayed is sometimes referred to as a line-nondisplay reach formation effect. A "reach formation effect" in which a normal mode reach line is displayed is sometimes referred to as a normal line-display reach formation effect. A "reach formation effect" in which a special mode reach line is displayed is sometimes referred to as a special line-display reach formation effect.

The presentation control microcomputer 121 can select the reach line by referring to the special chart 1 variation pattern. Specifically, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Battle jackpot variation" (THP001), "Character jackpot variation" (THP002), or "N jackpot variation" (THP003), the presentation control microcomputer 121 selects to display the reach line 50% of the time and to hide the reach line 50% of the time. Furthermore, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Battle jackpot variation" (THP001), "Character jackpot variation" (THP002), or "N jackpot variation" (THP003), the presentation control microcomputer 121 selects to display the normal mode reach line 20% of the time and the special mode reach line 30% of the time.

When the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Battle Miss Variation" (THP011), "Character Miss Variation" (THP012), or "N Miss Variation" (THP013), the presentation control microcomputer 121 selects the display of the reach line 95% of the time and the non-display of the reach line 5% of the time. Furthermore, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is "Battle Miss Variation" (THP011), "Character Miss Variation" (THP012), or "N Miss Variation" (THP013), the presentation control microcomputer 121 selects the display of the normal mode reach line 70% of the time and the display of the special mode reach line 25% of the time.

When the special chart 1 variation pattern is a "normal A miss variation" (THP021) or a "normal B miss variation" (THP022), the "reach formation effect" that forms a reach is not executed. Therefore, in this form, the effect control microcomputer 121 does not select whether or not to display the reach line when the special chart 1 variation pattern is a "normal A miss variation" (THP021) or a "normal B miss variation" (THP022). Note that even when the "reach formation effect" is not executed, it is possible to configure it so that the reach line is not displayed 100% of the time.

In other words, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is a "battle jackpot variation," "character jackpot variation," or "N jackpot variation" related to a jackpot, the "reach formation effect" is most likely to be selected in the following order: no reach line displayed (line-displayed reach formation effect) > special mode reach line displayed (special line-displayed reach formation effect) > normal mode reach line displayed (normal line-displayed reach formation effect). On the other hand, when the special chart 1 variation pattern is related to a miss, the likelihood of these patterns being selected tends to be the opposite of when the special chart 1 variation pattern is related to a jackpot. Therefore, the "reach formation effect" functions as an effect suggesting a high probability of a jackpot in the following order: no reach line displayed (line-displayed reach formation effect) > special mode reach line displayed (special line-displayed reach formation effect) > normal mode reach line displayed (normal line-displayed reach formation effect). The selection ratio indicated by the reach line selection table shown in Figure 75 can also be changed as appropriate.

Next, the manner in which the "reach formation effect" is executed will be explained using Figures 76, 77, and 78. Figure 76 is a diagram showing the manner in which a normal line display reach formation effect is performed. When the special pattern variation effect in which the "reach formation effect" is performed begins, first, the left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, and right effect pattern EZ3 begin to vary in the left effect pattern area 50b1, middle effect pattern area 50b2, and right effect pattern area 50b3 on the display unit 50a, respectively. In this embodiment, the left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, and right effect pattern EZ3 are all made up of letters. In this embodiment, they are Arabic numerals. Note that the letters that make up the left effect pattern EZ1, middle effect pattern EZ2, and right effect pattern EZ3 can also be alphabets, Roman numerals, Chinese numerals, etc.

In the normal line display reach formation effect, as shown in Figure 76 (A), of the left effect pattern EZ1, center effect pattern EZ2, and right effect pattern EZ3, which have begun to change display, a reach is formed by the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3. In other words, the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 are displayed in the same or corresponding stop mode. Figure 76 (A) shows an example in which a reach is formed in the stop mode of "5," in which the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 are the same type. When forming a reach, the stop timing of the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 can be, for example, such that the left effect pattern EZ1 is stopped first, followed by the right effect pattern EZ3. Note that a reach can also be formed by first stopping the right effect pattern EZ3, followed by the left effect pattern EZ1. Alternatively, a reach may be achieved by stopping the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 at the same time.

Figure 76 also shows the left pattern center CP1, right pattern center CP2, left pattern left/right dividing line CA1, right pattern left/right dividing line CA3, and reach formation center line CB. The left pattern center CP1 is the center point of the left performance pattern EZ1 that forms the reach. The right pattern center CP2 is the center point of the right performance pattern EZ3 that forms the reach. The left pattern left/right dividing line CA1 is a line that divides the left performance pattern EZ1 that forms the reach into two equal parts in the left/right direction. The right pattern left/right dividing line CA3 is a line that divides the right performance pattern EZ3 that forms the reach into two equal parts in the left/right direction. The reach formation center line CB is a line that passes through the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2. The reach formation center line CB is a line that divides the left and right performance symbols EZ1 and EZ3 that form the reach into equal halves in the vertical direction. The left pattern center CP1 is the intersection of the left pattern left-right dividing line CA1 and the reach formation center line CB. The right pattern center CP2 is the intersection of the right pattern left-right dividing line CA3 and the reach formation center line CB.

When a reach is formed by the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, a reach line LA is displayed, as shown in Figure 76 (B). The reach line LA is of the normal type. By displaying this reach line LA, it is possible to emphasize that a reach has been formed. This makes it easy for the player to understand that a reach has been formed. Note that the reach line LA may, for example, begin to be displayed after the reach is formed, or may begin to be displayed simultaneously with the formation of the reach.

In this mode, the reach line LA in the normal mode is displayed on the reach formation center line CB. Specifically, the reach line LA in the normal mode appears (starts to be displayed) on the reach formation center line CB. In other words, the reach line LA in the normal mode is displayed at a position that passes through the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2. In the "reach formation effect" in which the reach line LA in the normal mode is displayed, a reach is formed, and after the reach line LA is displayed, the reach line LA is hidden as shown in Figure 76 (C).

Figure 77 is a diagram showing how a special line display reach formation effect is performed. Even in the special line display reach formation effect, as shown in Figure 77(A), a reach is formed by the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 out of the left performance pattern EZ1, middle performance pattern EZ2, and right performance pattern EZ3, for which variable display has begun. Figure 77(A) also shows an example in which a reach is formed when the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 stop in the "5" type, where the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 are the same type.

When a reach is formed by the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, a reach line LB is displayed, as shown in Figure 77 (B). The reach line LB is a special feature that looks different from the normal mode reach line LA (for example, has a different shape or color). The special mode reach line LB appears in a different position from the normal mode reach line LA.

In this embodiment, the reach line LB of the special mode is displayed on the non-reach formation center line CC. The non-reach formation center line CC is a line that indicates a different position from the reach formation center line CB. Specifically, the non-reach formation center line CC is a line that does not pass through either the left pattern center CP1 or the right pattern center CP2. Therefore, the reach line LB of the special mode appears at a position away from the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2. Note that the reach line LB may also begin to be displayed after the reach is formed, or simultaneously with the formation of the reach, for example.

After the special mode reach line LB is displayed on the non-reach formation center line CC, which does not pass through either the left pattern center CP1 or the right pattern center CP2, the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach both move in a direction that brings their respective centers, the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2, closer to the non-reach formation center line CC, as shown in Figure 77 (C). In the example of Figure 77, the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the reach move until their respective left pattern centers CP1 and right pattern centers CP2 align with the special mode reach line LB. In this way, in a "reach formation effect" in which the special mode reach line LB is displayed, a reach is formed and the reach line LB is displayed, and then the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the reach move to a position where they overlap the reach line LB, after which the reach line LB is hidden.

Furthermore, in this form of special line display reach formation effect, the appearance of the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 related to the reach changes. In the example of Figure 77, the appearance of the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 related to the reach changes as the left and right pattern centers CP1 and CP2, respectively, move in a direction approaching the reach line LB. This results in a special appearance that differs from before the reach is formed. Specifically, the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 related to the formation of the reach are in a white appearance showing only the outline. On the other hand, in a normal line display reach formation effect, such changes in the appearance of the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 do not occur in response to the formation of the reach (see Figure 76). In other words, in a special line display reach formation effect, it is possible to display the appearance of the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 in a manner different from that in a normal line display reach formation effect. For this reason, with the special line display reach formation effect, even if it is difficult for the player to grasp the formation of a reach because the reach line LB begins to be displayed at a position away from the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2, the player can still properly grasp the formation of a reach. Furthermore, with the special line display reach formation effect, it is possible to give the player a significantly different impression than with the normal line display reach formation effect.

The special line display reach formation effect differs from the regular line display reach formation effect in this way, which suggests that the likelihood of a jackpot game occurring is different from the regular line display reach formation effect.

Figure 78 is a diagram showing how a line-nondisplay reach formation effect is performed. Even in a line-nondisplay reach formation effect, as shown in Figure 78(A), a reach is formed by the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 out of the left performance pattern EZ1, center performance pattern EZ2, and right performance pattern EZ3, whose variable display has begun. Figure 78(A) also shows an example in which a reach is formed when the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 stop in the "5" type, where the left performance pattern EZ1 and the right performance pattern EZ3 are the same type.

When a reach is formed by the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3, as shown in Figure 78(B), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 involved in the formation of the reach are in a different form than when the reach was formed. In Figure 78(B), the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are shown in a larger size than when the reach was formed. In other words, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are in their normal form from the start of the fluctuation until the reach is formed, but after the reach is formed, they change from their normal form to a special form. Specifically, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 involved in the formation of the reach are in a larger form than when they are being displayed. Note that the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 involved in the formation of the reach may also change from their normal form to a special form simultaneously with the formation of the reach. This allows the player to easily understand that a reach has been formed, even in a reach formation effect where the line is not displayed.

In the line-non-display reach formation effect, a reach is formed using the normal left and right performance symbols EZ1 and EZ3, and after the left and right performance symbols EZ1 and EZ3 involved in the formation of the reach change to a special mode, the left and right performance symbols EZ1 and EZ3 change to the normal mode as shown in Figure 78 (C).

In this version, in normal line display reach formation effects and special line display reach formation effects, the appearance of the left effect symbol EZ1 and right effect symbol EZ3 is not considered to be a special appearance in line non-display reach formation effects. In other words, the special appearance of the left effect symbol EZ1 and right effect symbol EZ3 in special line display reach formation effects is different from the special appearance of the left effect symbol EZ1 and right effect symbol EZ3 in line non-display reach formation effects. As a result, in line non-display reach formation effects, the change in the appearance of the left effect symbol EZ1 and right effect symbol EZ3 can give the player a more special impression than when a reach line is displayed.

Next, the manner in which the "development effect" is executed will be explained using Figures 79 and 80. As mentioned above, in this form of "development effect," multiple candidates for development are presented, and the actual development destination is suggested from among those multiple candidates. In addition, when indicating which of the multiple development destinations will be developed to, an "operation prompt effect" is performed.

As shown in Figure 79 (A), when the "development effect" begins, a battle development image GX1 indicating a "battle reach" and a character development image GX2 indicating a "character reach" are displayed on the display unit 50a as potential development destinations. In the example of Figure 79, the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 are displayed at different positions in the left-right direction on the display unit 50a. Note that, for example, the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 may also be displayed at different positions in the up-down direction on the display unit 50a. Also, for example, the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 may also be displayed at different positions in the diagonal direction on the display unit 50a.

Next, as shown in Figure 79 (B), the "operation prompt effect" begins. In the "operation prompt effect," an operation prompt image GY is displayed on the display unit 50a. The operation prompt image GY includes a normal button image GY1, which is an image imitating the normal button 40, a press operation image GY2, which indicates the operation mode of the normal button 40, and a remaining valid operation period image GY3. The operation prompt image GY is displayed between the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2. Note that if the gap between the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 is smaller than the gap between the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2, the operation prompt image GY may overlap with each of the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2. In this case, it is preferable that the operation prompt image GY be displayed in front of the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2. In the "operation promotion effect," the remaining valid operation period image GY3 changes over time, as shown in Figure 80 (A), so that the player can easily understand the remaining time in the valid operation period.

If the effect that follows the "development effect" is a battle reach, a battle reach selection effect is displayed in response to pressing the normal button 40 during the valid operation period. The battle reach selection effect is an effect that indicates that the effect (development destination) that follows the "development effect" is a battle reach. In this form of the battle reach selection effect, the first button disappearance effect and the battle area expansion effect are displayed in this order on the display unit 50a.

In the first button removal effect, as shown in Figure 80 (B), the first normal button change image GZ1 is displayed. The first normal button change image GZ1 is an image in which an image imitating the normal button 40 displayed in the operation prompt image GY extends toward the battle development image GX1 indicating the development destination, "Battle Reach." The first normal button change image GZ1 is then hidden. In other words, in the first button removal effect, the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" is changed to an image in which it protrudes toward the battle development image GX1 indicating the development destination, in response to the operation of the normal button 40, and then is removed (hidden). Therefore, in the first button removal effect, the removal of the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" can suggest that the development destination is "Battle Reach."

In the Battle Reach selection effect, upon completion of the first button clearing effect, a battle area expansion effect is performed, in which the display area of the battle development image GX1, which indicates the development destination "Battle Reach," is expanded compared to the display area during the "operation prompt effect," as shown in FIG. 80(C). This battle area expansion effect makes it possible to more clearly indicate to the player that "Battle Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Furthermore, in this form of the Battle Reach selection effect, the character development image GX2 is reduced in size relative to the display area of the battle development image GX1. This makes it possible to more clearly indicate that "Battle Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Note that in the battle area expansion effect, the display area of the battle development image GX1 may be expanded to almost the entire display unit 50a. Furthermore, in the battle area expansion effect, the display area of the character development image GX2 may be reduced, and ultimately, the character development image GX2 may be hidden while the battle development image GX1 continues to be displayed. Subsequently, upon completion of the Battle Reach selection effect, "Battle Reach" begins. In other words, the background image will change to a special "Battle Reach" background, and the main character will begin battling an enemy character.

If the effect that follows the "development effect" is a character reach, a character reach selection effect is displayed in response to pressing the normal button 40 during the valid operation period. The character reach selection effect is an effect that indicates that the effect (development destination) that follows the "development effect" is a character reach. In this form of character reach selection effect, the second button disappearance effect and the character area expansion effect are displayed in this order on the display unit 50a.

In the second button erasure effect, as shown in FIG. 80(D), the second normal button change image GZ2 is displayed. The second normal button change image GZ2 is an image showing how the image imitating the normal button 40 displayed in the operation prompt image GY has changed to a different state from the first normal button change image GZ1. In this embodiment, the second normal button change image GZ2 is an image in which the image imitating the normal button 40 gradually fades and disappears. The second normal button change image GZ2 is then completely hidden. In other words, in the second button erasure effect, the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" is changed to a state in which it gradually disappears in response to the operation of the normal button 40, and then erased (hidden). Therefore, in the second button erasure effect, the erasure state of the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" differs from the first button erasure effect, which can suggest that the development is to "Battle Reach." As a result, the second button erasure effect can suggest that the development is not to "Battle Reach." In other words, it is possible to indirectly suggest that the development path will be "Character Reach."

In the character reach selection effect, upon completion of the second button erasure effect, as shown in FIG. 80(E), a character area expansion effect is performed in which the display area of the character development image GX2, indicating the development destination "Chara Reach," is expanded compared to the display area during the "operation prompt effect." This character area expansion effect makes it possible to more clearly indicate to the player that "Chara Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Furthermore, in this form of character reach selection effect, the battle development image GX1, indicating "Battle Reach" as the development destination, is reduced in size relative to the display area of the character development image GX2. This makes it possible to more clearly indicate that "Chara Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Note that in the character area expansion effect, the display area of the character development image GX2 may be expanded to almost the entire display unit 50a. Furthermore, in the character area expansion effect, the display area of the battle development image GX1 may be reduced, and ultimately, the battle development image GX1 may be hidden while the character development image GX2 continues to be displayed. Subsequently, upon completion of the character reach selection effect, "Chara Reach" begins. In other words, the background image will change to a special "Chara Reach" background, and the characters will begin challenging themselves to a mission.

As explained in detail above, the game control microcomputer 101 of the pachinko game machine PY1 according to the above embodiment is capable of creating a jackpot game state advantageous to the player. The effect control microcomputer 121 is capable of displaying a predetermined effect image on the display unit 50a of the image display device 50. The effect control microcomputer 121 is capable of executing a special symbol variation effect in which the left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3 are displayed in a variable manner in the left effect pattern area 50b1, the middle effect pattern area 50b2, and the right effect pattern area 50b3, respectively, and then displaying them in a static manner. Furthermore, during the special symbol variation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 may execute a reach formation effect in which the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3, which are part of the left effect pattern EZ1, the middle effect pattern EZ2, and the right effect pattern EZ3, form a reach. Furthermore, as reach formation effects, there are times when a special line display reach formation effect is executed and times when a normal line display reach formation effect is executed. The special line display reach formation effect is a reach formation effect in which a special mode reach line LB is displayed at a position away from the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2, which are the respective centers of the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach. The normal line display reach formation effect is a reach formation effect in which a normal mode reach line LA is displayed at a position passing through the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2, which are the respective centers of the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach. In other words, in the normal line display reach formation effect, the reach line LA is displayed at a position closer to the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2 than in the special line display reach formation effect. Furthermore, the likelihood of a jackpot game state being reached differs between when a normal line display reach formation effect is executed and when a special line display reach formation effect is executed. This allows the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment to execute a variety of reach formation effects, thereby increasing the game's enjoyment.

Furthermore, in the special line display reach formation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 can display the left effect symbol EZ1 and right effect symbol EZ3 related to the formation of a reach in a different manner than in the normal line display reach formation effect. This can make the special line display reach formation effect and the normal line display reach formation effect stand out more. Furthermore, in the special line display reach formation effect, even if the reach line LB is offset from the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are emphasized, allowing the player to properly understand that a reach has been formed. Furthermore, the special line display reach formation effect can give the player a more special feeling than the normal line display reach formation effect. This can increase the player's anticipation for a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the special line display reach formation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 starts displaying the reach line LB so that it does not overlap with the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2, and then moves the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 so that the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2 are aligned with the reach line LB that has begun to be displayed. In other words, it is possible to move the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3 in a direction that moves the left pattern center CP1 and the right pattern center CP2 closer to the reach line LB that has begun to be displayed. This makes it possible to make the reach line LB that has begun to be displayed seem to further emphasize the formation of a reach by the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3.

The effect control microcomputer 121 also executes reach formation effects, either with a line display or with a non-line display. For example, when a normal line display reach formation effect is executed as a line display reach formation effect, the normal reach line LA is displayed. On the other hand, a non-line display reach formation effect does not display a reach line. The likelihood of a jackpot game state being set differs between when a line display reach formation effect is executed and when a non-line display reach formation effect is executed. This allows the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment to execute a variety of reach formation effects, thereby enhancing entertainment value.

Furthermore, in the non-display reach formation effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 can display the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of a reach in a different manner than in the line-display reach formation effect. As a result, in the line-display reach formation effect, even if the reach line is not displayed, the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 are highlighted, making it possible for the player to properly understand that a reach will be formed by these. Furthermore, in the line-display reach formation effect, it is possible for the player to feel a sense of exclusivity more than in the line-display reach formation effect. This can increase the player's anticipation for a jackpot game.

The performance control microcomputer 121 is also capable of executing an operation prompting effect in an advanced performance in which an operation prompting image GY is displayed to prompt the player to operate the normal button 40. In response to the normal button 40 being operated while the operation prompting image GY is displayed in the operation prompting effect, the performance control microcomputer 121 may either display and then erase a first normal button change image GZ1, or display and then erase a second normal button change image GZ2 that is different from the first normal button change image GZ1. The first normal button change image GZ1 and the second normal button change image GZ2 are images that resemble the normal button 40, similar to the normal button image GY1 included in the operation prompting image GY. In other words, in response to the normal button 40 being operated while the operation prompting image GY is displayed in the operation prompting effect, the performance control microcomputer 121 may either change the appearance of the image that resembles the normal button 40 to a special appearance and then erase it, or erase it without changing it to the special appearance. In this way, by having multiple ways of erasing the image resembling the normal button 40 in response to the operation of the normal button 40, it is possible to arouse the player's interest in operating the normal button 40. In other words, it is possible to increase the player's interest in operating the normal button 40.

Furthermore, in the development effect, the effect control microcomputer 121 can execute an operation prompting effect while displaying a battle development image GX1 and a character development image GX2, which are multiple options suggesting the subsequent effect. When the battle development image GX1 is selected in response to the operation of the normal button 40 in the operation prompting effect, the first normal button change image GZ1 is displayed and then the image imitating the normal button 40 is erased. On the other hand, when the character development image GX2 is selected, the image imitating the normal button 40 is erased without displaying the first normal button change image GZ1. This makes it possible to arouse the player's interest in operating the normal button 40 in an effect in which a selection is made from multiple options by operating the normal button 40.

Furthermore, when the battle development image GX1 is selected, the first normal button change image GZ1 protrudes further toward the battle development image GX1 than the normal button image GY1 included in the operation prompt image GY. This makes it possible to emphasize that the battle development image GX1 has been selected when the battle development image GX1 is selected, thereby increasing interest.

Furthermore, the likelihood of a subsequent jackpot game being played differs between displaying the first normal button change image GZ1 and then erasing the image simulating the normal button 40, and erasing the image simulating the normal button 40 without displaying the first normal button change image GZ1. This makes it possible to further increase the player's interest in the operation promotion effect using the normal button 40.

The pachinko gaming machine PY1 also has an on-board movable body 55k, which is a movable body associated with the below-board movable device 56, and a first below-board movable body 56KA and a second below-board movable body 56KB, which are movable bodies associated with the below-board movable device 56. The effect control microcomputer 121 is capable of executing the second, third, and fifth actuation effects as start-up actuation effects. In the second actuation effect, the on-board movable body 55k is activated. In the third actuation effect, the on-board movable body 55k and the first below-board movable body 56KA are activated. In the fifth actuation effect, the on-board movable body 55k and the second below-board movable body 56KB are activated. The second actuation effect suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot being played than the third and fifth actuation effects. In other words, a smaller number of movable bodies in an activated state may suggest a higher likelihood of a jackpot being played than a larger number. This can increase the enjoyment of playing the game.

The effect control microcomputer 121 can also execute the fourth and sixth actuation effects as start-up actuation effects. In the fourth actuation effect, the first under-board movable body 56KA is activated. In the sixth actuation effect, the second under-board movable body 56KB is activated. The fourth actuation effect suggests a lower likelihood of a jackpot being played than the third actuation effect. The sixth actuation effect suggests a lower likelihood of a jackpot being played than the fifth actuation effect. In other words, having a larger number of movable bodies in an activated state may suggest a higher likelihood of a jackpot being played than having a smaller number of movable bodies in an activated state. This prevents the effects produced by the actuation of the movable bodies from becoming monotonous, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

The effect control microcomputer 121 can also execute the first actuation effect as the initial actuation effect. In the first actuation effect, the above-board movable body 55k, the first below-board movable body 56KA, and the second below-board movable body 56KB are activated. The first actuation effect suggests a higher likelihood of a jackpot being played than the second actuation effect. In other words, the impressive first actuation effect, in which multiple movable bodies, the actuation states of which may overlap, are activated together, can be expected to have an expectation level that matches the impression it gives. This can increase the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, the effect control microcomputer 121 is capable of displaying the second operation effect display G55 on the display unit 50a during the second operation effect, but does not display the second operation effect display G55 on the display unit 50a during the third and fifth operation effects. This makes it possible to impart a sense of exclusivity to the second operation effect, which has few movable bodies in an activated state. Therefore, even when there are few movable bodies in an activated state, it is possible to sufficiently heighten the player's anticipation for a jackpot game.

Modifications of the Fifth Embodiment Next, modifications of the pachinko gaming machine PY1 of this embodiment will be described. In the description of the modifications, the same components as those of the above embodiment will be assigned the same reference numerals and will not be described again. Of course, the components of the modifications may be appropriately combined. Furthermore, technical features in this embodiment and the following modifications may be appropriately deleted unless they are described as essential in this specification.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, in the special line display reach formation effect and the non-line display reach formation effect, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to the formation of the reach are described as being different in appearance from the normal line display reach formation effect. However, for example, in the special line display reach formation effect and the non-line display reach formation effect, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to the formation of the reach can also be the same in appearance as the normal line display reach formation effect. Also, for example, in the special line display reach formation effect and the non-line display reach formation effect, the timing at which the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 related to the formation of the reach are changed to a different appearance from the normal line display reach formation effect is not limited to the timing described in the above-described embodiment. Specifically, for example, the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 can be changed to a different appearance from the normal line display reach formation effect when the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3 are the same or of the same type and stop in a corresponding manner. Also, for example, when executing a special line display reach formation effect or a line non-display reach formation effect, the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach may be set to a different form from the normal line display reach formation effect, and then subsequent effects may be allowed to proceed without being changed to the same form as the normal line display reach formation effect.

For example, in the above embodiment, in the normal line display reach formation effect, the reach line LA is described as being displayed at a position that passes through the center of the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach. However, in the normal line display reach formation effect, the reach line LA only needs to appear at a position closer to the center of the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach than the reach line LB in the special line display reach formation effect, and does not necessarily have to appear at a position that passes through the center of these patterns. Note that, from the perspective of indicating the formation of a reach with the reach line LA, it is preferable that the reach line LA be displayed at a position that overlaps at least a portion of both the left effect pattern EZ1 and the right effect pattern EZ3. For example, in a special line display reach formation effect, after the display of reach line LB begins, the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 related to the formation of the reach can be moved in a direction such that their centers approach reach line LB, and they do not necessarily have to be moved to a position where their centers overlap with reach line LB. Note that, when the reach line LB is displayed in a position where it does not overlap either the left or right effect symbol EZ1 or EZ3, and then the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 are moved toward the reach line LB, it is preferable to move the left and right effect symbols EZ1 and EZ3 to a position where the reach line LB overlaps at least a portion of them, from the perspective of indicating the formation of a reach with the reach line LB.

For example, in the above embodiment, in the special line display reach formation effect, the display of the reach line LB is started so that it does not overlap with the center of the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach, and then these patterns are moved in a direction so that their centers approach the reach line LB. However, for example, in the special line display reach formation effect, the left effect pattern EZ1 and right effect pattern EZ3 related to the formation of the reach may not be moved toward the reach line LB.

Furthermore, for example, the probability of execution of an effect suggesting a high expectation of a subsequent jackpot game may be different for each of the normal line display reach formation effect, the special line display reach formation effect, and the non-line display reach formation effect. Specifically, for example, when a special line display reach formation effect is performed, a battle reach may be more likely to be executed afterwards than when a normal line display reach formation effect is performed. Also, for example, when a non-line display reach formation effect is performed, a battle reach may be more likely to be executed afterwards than when a special line display reach formation effect is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that when a normal line display reach formation effect is performed, a character reach may be more likely to be executed afterwards than when a special line display reach formation effect is performed. Furthermore, it may be configured such that when a special line display reach formation effect is performed, a character reach may be more likely to be executed afterwards than when a non-line display reach formation effect is performed.

Furthermore, for example, the expectation of a jackpot game occurring in relation to the normal line display reach formation effect, special line display reach formation effect, and non-line display reach formation effect described above is merely an example and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the expectation of a jackpot game occurring is not limited to non-line display reach formation effect > special line display reach formation effect > normal line display reach formation effect, and may be changed as appropriate.

Furthermore, for example, the normal line display reach formation effect, special line display reach formation effect, and non-display line reach formation effect may each have a different execution time. For example, if all are executed for the same amount of time, the non-display line reach formation effect may seem redundant compared to the line display reach formation effect because the reach line is not displayed. Therefore, for example, the line display reach formation effect may be made to last for a shorter time than the non-display line reach formation effect.

Also, for example, in the above embodiment, an example was explained in which three symbols - left effect symbol EZ1, middle effect symbol EZ2, and right effect symbol EZ3 - were used as the multiple symbols that undergo pattern changes (changing display and stopping display) in the special symbol change display. However, the multiple symbols that undergo pattern changes may be, for example, four. Also, for example, in the above embodiment, an example was explained in which a reach was formed by the left effect symbol EZ1 and the right effect symbol EZ3. However, other combinations may also be used to form a reach. Specifically, for example, a reach may be formed by the left effect symbol EZ1 and the middle effect symbol EZ2.

In the above embodiment, for example, in the operation prompting effect in which a predetermined selection is made in response to the operation of the operating means, if the development destination is "Battle Reach", the image imitating the normal button 40 is changed to a form in which it protrudes toward the battle development image GX1 and then erased, and if the development destination is "Chara Reach", the image imitating the normal button 40 is erased in a form in which it gradually disappears. However, for example, if the development destination is "Chara Reach", the image imitating the normal button 40 may also be changed to a form in which it protrudes toward the character development image GX2 in response to the operation of the normal button 40 and then erased.

In the above embodiment, for example, when an operation prompt is performed in a development effect, an example was described in which the image resembling the normal button 40 is changed to a form in which it protrudes toward the image related to the option indicating the destination of development, and then erased. However, for example, the image resembling the normal button 40 in the operation prompt effect may be changed to a form in which it protrudes toward the image related to the option that is not the destination of development, and then erased.

An example of an operation prompt effect in which an image resembling the normal button 40 protrudes toward the image corresponding to the option that is not the development destination will be described with reference to Figures 81 and 82. As shown in Figure 81 (A), when the "development effect" begins, a battle development image GX1 indicating "battle reach" and a character development image GX2 indicating "character reach" are displayed on the display unit 50a as development destination candidates. In the example of Figure 81, the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 are displayed at different positions in the left-right direction on the display unit 50a. In this example, the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 are displayed in a manner such that they push against each other. Note that, for example, the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 may be displayed at different positions in the up-down direction on the display unit 50a. Also, for example, the battle development image GX1 and the character development image GX2 may be displayed at different positions in the diagonal direction of the display unit 50a.

Next, as shown in Figure 81 (B), the "operation prompt effect" begins. In the "operation prompt effect," an operation prompt image GY is displayed on the display unit 50a. The operation prompt image GY includes a normal button image GY1, a press operation image GY2, and a remaining valid operation period image GY3. In the "operation prompt effect," the remaining valid operation period image GY3 changes over time, as shown in Figure 82 (A), so that the player can easily understand the remaining time of the valid operation period.

In this example, if the effect that is performed after the "development effect" is a battle reach, the battle reach selection effect is performed in response to pressing the normal button 40 during the valid operation period. For example, in the battle reach selection effect, the first button erasure effect and the battle area expansion effect are performed in this order on the display unit 50a.

In the first button removal effect, as shown in Figure 82 (B), the first normal button change image GZ3 is displayed. The first normal button change image GZ3 is an image in which an image imitating the normal button 40 displayed in the operation prompt image GY extends toward the character development image GX2, which indicates the "character reach" that is not a development destination. The first normal button change image GZ3 is then hidden. In other words, in the first button removal effect, the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" is changed to an image in which it protrudes toward the character development image GX2, which indicates the non-development destination, in response to the operation of the normal button 40, and then is removed (not displayed).

Furthermore, in response to the display of the first normal button change image GZ3, the character development image GX2 is moved toward the outside of the display unit 50a. This makes it possible to suggest that the character development image GX2 relating to an option that is not a development destination has been removed from the selection in the operation prompt effect. At that time, the first normal button change image GZ3 makes it appear as if the character development image GX2 has been pushed toward the outside of the display unit 50a. Therefore, in the first button removal effect, the removal of the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" can suggest that the development destination is "Battle Reach." Furthermore, it is preferable to move the battle development image GX1 indicating the development destination toward the center of the display unit 50a in response to the display of the first normal button change image GZ3. This is because it is possible to more emphatically indicate that the development destination is "Battle Reach."

In this modified battle reach selection effect, as shown in FIG. 82(C), upon completion of the first button erasure effect, a battle area expansion effect is performed in which the display area of the battle development image GX1 indicating the development destination "Battle Reach" is expanded compared to the display area during the "operation prompt effect." This battle area expansion effect makes it easier for the player to understand that "Battle Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Furthermore, in this form of battle area expansion effect, the display area of the battle development image GX1 is expanded to cover almost the entire display unit 50a. Furthermore, in the battle reach selection effect, all of the character development image GX2 that has moved outside the display unit 50a is ultimately hidden. This makes it possible to more clearly indicate that "Battle Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Subsequently, upon completion of the battle reach selection effect, the "Battle Reach" begins. That is, the background image switches to a dedicated "Battle Reach" background, and an effect begins in which the main character battles an enemy character.

If the effect that occurs after the "development effect" is a character reach, a character reach selection effect is displayed in response to pressing the normal button 40 during the valid operation period. The character reach selection effect is an effect that indicates that the effect (development destination) that occurs after the "development effect" is a character reach. In the character reach selection effect, first, the second button disappearance effect and the character area expansion effect are displayed in this order on the display unit 50a.

In the second button removal effect, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the second normal button change image GZ2 is displayed. The second normal button change image GZ2 is an image showing how the image imitating the normal button 40 displayed in the operation prompt image GY has changed to a different state from the first normal button change image GZ3. In this embodiment, the second normal button change image GZ2 is an image in which the image imitating the normal button 40 gradually fades and disappears. Thereafter, the second normal button change image GZ2 is completely hidden. In other words, in the second button removal effect, the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" is changed to a state in which it gradually disappears in response to the operation of the normal button 40, and then is removed (hidden). Note that the second normal button change image GZ2 does not necessarily have to be displayed in the second button removal effect. This is the same in the above-mentioned embodiment.

Furthermore, in response to the display of the second normal button change image GZ2, the battle development image GX1 is moved toward the outside of the display unit 50a. This makes it possible to suggest that the battle development image GX1 relating to an option that is not a development destination has been removed from the selection in the operation prompt effect. Then, in the second button removal effect, the manner in which the normal button image GY1 displayed in the "operation prompt effect" is removed makes it possible to suggest that the development destination is "character reach." Furthermore, it is preferable that the character development image GX2 indicating the development destination is moved toward the center of the display unit 50a in response to the display of the second normal button change image GZ2. This is because it is possible to more emphatically indicate that the development destination is "character reach."

In the character reach selection effect, as shown in FIG. 82(E), upon completion of the first button clearing effect, a character area expansion effect is performed in which the display area of the character development image GX2 indicating the development destination "Chara Reach" is expanded compared to the display area during the "operation prompt effect." This character area expansion effect makes it easier for the player to understand that "Chara Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Furthermore, in this form of character area expansion effect, the display area of the character development image GX2 is expanded to almost the entire display unit 50a. Furthermore, in the character reach selection effect, the battle development image GX1 that has moved outside the display unit 50a is ultimately hidden entirely. This makes it possible to more clearly indicate that "Chara Reach" has been selected as the development destination. Subsequently, upon completion of the character reach selection effect, "Chara Reach" begins. That is, the background image switches to a background dedicated to "Chara Reach," and an effect begins in which the featured characters challenge missions. Furthermore, if the development destination is a "character reach," the image imitating the normal button 40 may be changed to a form in which it protrudes toward the battle development image GX1 in response to the normal button 40 being operated, and then erased. In this way, even if the development destination is a "character reach," the changed image imitating the normal button 40 may cause the battle development image GX1 to move toward the outside of the display unit 50a, suggesting that it has been removed from the selection in the operation promotion presentation.

For example, in the above embodiments and modified examples, an example is described in which there are two options in the operation prompt effect, in which a predetermined selection is made in response to the operation of the operation means. However, there may be multiple options, and there may be three or more. Furthermore, in cases other than when a predetermined selection is made in response to the operation of the operation means, multiple ways of erasing the image that resembles the normal button 40 in the operation prompt effect may be prepared. If there are multiple ways of erasing the image that resembles the normal button 40 in the operation prompt effect, it is preferable that each of these ways has a different expected probability of winning a jackpot. Furthermore, for example, the operation prompt effect in the advanced effect is not limited to the normal button 40, and may be an effect that uses other operation means (for example, the special button 41).

Furthermore, for example, in the above embodiment, the arrangement of the movable bodies used in the start-up operation presentation is merely an example, and different arrangements are possible. For example, in the above embodiment, all movable bodies that can be activated in the start-up operation presentation are described as being included in the presentation unit 1U mounted on the game board unit YU. However, some or all of the movable bodies that can be activated in the start-up operation presentation may be movable bodies provided in the game machine frame 2.

For example, in the above embodiment, a configuration was described in which the specific movable body (on-board movable body 55k), which is the movable body related to the second actuation performance, is located above the non-specific movable bodies (first below-board movable body 56KA, second below-board movable body 56KB) that are different from the specific movable body. However, the arrangement of the specific movable body and the non-specific movable bodies may be reversed from the above embodiment. Furthermore, players tend to frequently come into contact with the handle 72k of the pachinko gaming machine PY1. Therefore, if the specific movable body is located closer to the handle 72k than the non-specific movable body, it is possible to make the player feel a stronger vibration in the second actuation performance. In other words, it is possible to make the second actuation performance more impactful.

Furthermore, for example, in the start-up activation performance, the activation mode of the movable body may be different for each pattern. For example, in the second activation performance, the activation period of a specific movable body may be longer than in the third and fifth activation performances. In this way, the second activation performance, in which fewer movable bodies are activated, can be made to have a more impressive and special feel.

Furthermore, for example, in the above embodiment, the fourth actuation effect was described as suggesting a lower likelihood of a jackpot being played than the third actuation effect. However, for example, the likelihood of a jackpot being played suggested by the third actuation effect and the fourth actuation effect may be the same. The same applies to the relationship between the fifth actuation effect and the sixth actuation effect.

Also, for example, it is possible to perform an effect in which multiple non-specific movable bodies are activated without activating a specific movable body. If an effect in which multiple non-specific movable bodies are activated is possible, it is preferable that the likelihood of a jackpot associated with this effect be lower than that of the second operation effect. This is because the second operation effect in which specific movable bodies are activated without activating non-specific movable bodies can be more effectively effective in heightening the player's sense of anticipation.

Also, for example, in the above embodiment, the execution timing of the first to sixth activation effects was described as the start of the special chart change effect. However, it is of course possible to execute these effects at a timing other than the start of the special chart change effect. For example, they may be executed midway through the special chart change effect, such as an advanced effect, or as a pre-reading effect that can start before the start of the special chart change effect.

For example, in the above embodiment, each effect was described as being capable of suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot being achieved. However, for example, if there are multiple game states that can be controlled after the effect, it may be possible to suggest the likelihood of being controlled to a more advantageous state compared to the most disadvantageous state for the player.

13. Inventions Shown in the Above-described Embodiments The above-described embodiments show the following Invention A (A1-A3), Invention B (B1-B3), Invention C (C1-C5), and Invention D (D1-D5). In the following description of the inventions, corresponding component names and expressions in the above-described embodiments and symbols used in the drawings are added in parentheses for reference. However, the components of each invention are not limited to these additions.

Invention A1 is
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) that can create an advantageous game state (a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) that can execute a performance using an image display unit (image display device 50) that can display a predetermined performance image on a display unit (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means
A plurality of patterns (left performance pattern EZ1, middle performance pattern EZ2, right performance pattern EZ3) are displayed in different areas of the display unit (left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, right performance pattern area 50b3), and then a variable performance that stops and displays the pattern can be executed.
During the variable performance, a reach formation performance may be executed to form a reach using some of the multiple patterns (left performance pattern EZ1, right performance pattern EZ3),
In the reach formation performance, there are times when the reach line that can indicate the formation of reach is displayed in a specific mode (reach line LB) and times when it is displayed in a non-specific mode (reach line LA) that is different from the specific mode,
As the reach formation performance,
When a specific reach formation effect (special line display reach formation effect) is executed in which the reach line of the specific mode may be displayed at a position (non-reach formation center line CC) away from the center of the pattern (left pattern center CP1, right pattern center CP2) related to the formation of the reach, thereby suggesting a specific expectation level as the expectation level of the advantageous game state,
This gaming machine may suggest a degree of expectation different from the specific degree of expectation by executing a non-specific reach formation effect (normal line display reach formation effect) in which the reach line of the non-specific pattern is displayed at a position closer to the center of the pattern related to the formation of the reach (reach formation center line CB) than in the specific reach formation effect.

Conventionally, some gaming machines have used an effect in which multiple symbols are displayed in a variable manner on the display unit, followed by a static display. Furthermore, as described in JP 2020-81412 A, for example, such gaming machines may also use a reach formation effect in which some symbols form a reach as an effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot. However, as described above, gaming machines capable of executing reach formation effects have room for improvement to further increase the game's entertainment value. Furthermore, this gaming machine differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2020-81412 A in that "in the reach formation effect, the reach line that can indicate the formation of reach is sometimes displayed in a specific manner and sometimes in a non-specific manner different from the specific manner. As a reach formation effect, a specific reach formation effect is executed in which the reach line in a specific manner is displayed farther from the center of the symbols related to the formation of reach, thereby suggesting a specific expectation level for a favorable gaming state, and a non-specific reach formation effect is executed in which the reach line in a non-specific manner is displayed closer to the center of the symbols related to the formation of reach than in the specific reach formation effect, thereby suggesting a different expectation level." This allows the gaming machine to execute a variety of reach formation effects. Therefore, this gaming machine can solve the problem (achieve the effect) of "enhancing gaming interest through effects."

Invention A2 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention A1,
The performance execution means
In the specific reach formation presentation, the gaming machine is capable of displaying the symbols related to the formation of a reach in a manner different from that in the non-specific reach formation presentation.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to create a more distinct impression between the specific reach formation effects and the non-specific reach formation effects, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Invention A3 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention A1 or invention A2,
The performance execution means
In the specific reach formation presentation, the gaming machine starts displaying the reach line so that it does not overlap with the center of the pattern related to the formation of the reach, and then moves the pattern related to the formation of the reach in a direction in which its center approaches the reach line whose display has started.

In a gaming machine with this configuration, the reach line that begins to be displayed during a specific reach formation presentation can be made to seem to emphasize the formation of a reach, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Invention B1 is
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) that can create an advantageous game state (a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) that can execute a performance using an image display unit (image display device 50) that can display a predetermined performance image on a display unit (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means
A plurality of patterns (left performance pattern EZ1, middle performance pattern EZ2, right performance pattern EZ3) are displayed in different areas of the display unit (left performance pattern area 50b1, middle performance pattern area 50b2, right performance pattern area 50b3), and then a variable performance that stops and displays the pattern can be executed.
During the variable performance, a reach formation performance may be executed to form a reach using some of the multiple patterns (left performance pattern EZ1, right performance pattern EZ3),
As the reach formation performance,
When a specific reach formation effect (line display reach formation effect) is executed to display a reach line (reach line LA, reach line LB) that can indicate the formation of a reach, thereby suggesting a specific expectation level as the expectation level of the advantageous game state,
This gaming machine may suggest a degree of expectation different from the specific degree of expectation by executing a non-specific reach formation effect (line non-display reach formation effect) in which the reach line is not displayed.

Conventionally, some gaming machines have used a display that displays multiple symbols in a fluctuating fashion and then stops them. Furthermore, as described in JP 2020-81412 A, for example, such gaming machines sometimes execute a reach formation effect in which certain symbols form a reach as an effect suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot. However, as noted above, gaming machines capable of executing reach formation effects have room for improvement to further enhance the game's appeal. The gaming machine of this configuration differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2020-81412 A in that "as a reach formation effect, a specific reach formation effect that displays a reach line that can indicate the formation of a reach may be executed, suggesting a specific expectation level for a favorable gaming state, or a non-specific reach formation effect that does not display a reach line may be executed, suggesting a different expectation level." This allows the gaming machine of this configuration to execute a variety of reach formation effects. Therefore, a gaming machine with this configuration can solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "enhancing gaming interest through presentation."

Invention B2 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention B1,
The performance execution means
In the non-specific reach formation presentation, the gaming machine is capable of displaying the symbols related to the formation of a reach in a manner different from that in the specific reach formation presentation.

With this gaming machine, it is possible to create a more distinct impression between the specific reach formation effects and the non-specific reach formation effects, thereby increasing the player's interest.

Invention B3 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention B1 or invention B2,
The performance execution means
A special suggestion effect that can suggest that the advantageous gaming state will be achieved can be executed,
In this gaming machine, after executing one of the specific reach formation presentation and the non-specific reach formation presentation, the special suggestion presentation is more likely to be executed than after executing the other.

In a gaming machine with this configuration, either the specific reach formation effect or the non-specific reach formation effect can give the player a more special feeling than the other, increasing their anticipation for a jackpot.

Invention C1 is
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with an operation unit (normal buttons 40) that can be operated by a player, and a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) that can execute a performance using a performance means including an image display unit (image display device 50) that can display a predetermined performance image on a display unit (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means
It is possible to execute an operation effect in which an operation prompting image (normal button image GY1) that prompts operation of the operation unit is displayed on the display unit,
When the operation unit is operated while the operation prompting image is displayed in the operation performance, the state of the operation prompting image is changed to a predetermined specific state (first normal button change image GZ1) and then erased;
This is a gaming machine in which, in response to the operation of the operation unit while the operation prompting image is being displayed in the operation presentation, the operation prompting image is erased without being changed to the specific form.

Conventionally, some gaming machines have provided effects in response to inputs to operating devices. Such gaming machines may also display effects on the display prompting players to input operations to the operating devices, as described in JP 2020-81412 A, for example. However, as described above, gaming machines that display effects prompting players to input operations to the operating devices have room for improvement to enhance their entertainment value. The gaming machine described in this specification differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2020-81412 A in that "in response to the operation of the operating device while the operation prompt image is displayed during the operation effect, the operation prompt image may be changed to a predetermined specific state before being erased, or in response to the operation of the operating device while the operation prompt image is displayed during the operation effect without being erased." This allows the gaming machine described in this specification to arouse players' interest in operating the operating device. Therefore, a gaming machine with this configuration can solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "enhancing gaming interest through presentation."

Invention C2 is
The gaming machine according to the above invention C1,
The performance execution means
In the operation performance, a plurality of option images showing options can be displayed (a battle development image GX1 and a character development image GX2 can be displayed),
When the operation unit is operated during the display of the operation prompting image in the operation performance, and a first option image (battle development image GX1) is selected from the plurality of option images, the mode of the operation prompting image may be changed to the specific mode and then erased.
This gaming machine may erase the operation prompting image without changing it to the specific form when a second option image (character development image GX2) different from the first option image is selected in response to the operation of the operation unit while the operation prompting image is displayed in the operation presentation.

A gaming machine with this configuration can arouse the player's interest in operating the operating means in a presentation in which a selection is made from multiple options by operating the operating means, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Invention C3 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention C2,
In this gaming machine, the operation promotion image in the specific mode is a mode (first normal button change image GZ1) that protrudes toward the first option image more than the operation promotion mode, which is the mode of the operation promotion image before the operation unit is operated.

When the first option image is selected, the gaming machine of this configuration can display a specific type of operation prompt image to emphasize that the first option image has been selected. This can increase the gaming machine's interest.

Invention C4 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention C2,
In this gaming machine, the operation promotion image in the specific mode is a mode (first normal button change image GZ3) that protrudes toward the second option image more than the operation promotion mode, which is the mode of the operation promotion image before the operation unit is operated.

When the first option image is selected, the gaming machine of this configuration can display a specific type of operation prompt image to emphasize that the first option image has been selected. This can increase the gaming machine's interest.

Invention C5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the above inventions C1 to C4,
The game control means (game control microcomputer 101) is provided to create a game state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player,
This gaming machine is more likely to enter the advantageous gaming state when the mode of the operation prompting image changes to the specific mode and then is erased, or when the image is erased without changing to the specific mode, in response to the operation of the operation unit while the operation prompting image is displayed in the operation presentation, than when the mode of the operation prompting image changes to the specific mode and then is erased.

A gaming machine with this configuration can further increase players' interest in the operation promotion effects that use the operating means.

Invention D1 is
A game control means (a game control microcomputer 101) that can create an advantageous game state (a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine PY1) equipped with a performance execution means (performance control microcomputer 121) capable of executing a performance using a performance means including a movable body,
The movable body includes a specific movable body (an on-board movable body 55k) and a non-specific movable body (a first below-board movable body 56KA or a second below-board movable body 56KB) different from the specific movable body,
The performance execution means
A first specific effect (third or fifth operation effect) that activates the specific movable body and the non-specific movable body and suggests a predetermined expectation level as the expectation level of the advantageous game state;
This gaming machine is capable of putting the specific movable body into an operating state without putting the non-specific movable body into an operating state, and executing a second specific effect (second operating effect) which suggests a higher expectation of achieving the advantageous gaming state than the first specific effect.

Conventionally, gaming machines have sometimes performed effects that activate movable bodies, as described in, for example, JP 2020-81412 A. However, as described above, gaming machines that perform effects that activate movable bodies have room for improvement to further enhance entertainment value. The gaming machine of this configuration differs from the gaming machine described in JP 2020-81412 A in that "the effect execution means is capable of executing a first specific effect that activates specific movable bodies and non-specific movable bodies, suggesting a predetermined expectation level for achieving a favorable gaming state, and a second specific effect that activates specific movable bodies without activating non-specific movable bodies, suggesting a higher expectation level for achieving a favorable gaming state than the first specific effect." As a result, in a gaming machine of this configuration, a smaller number of activated movable bodies may suggest a higher expectation level for achieving a favorable gaming state than a larger number. Therefore, a gaming machine with this configuration can solve the problem (achieve the effect of) "enhancing gaming interest through presentation."

Invention D2 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention D1,
The performance execution means
This is a gaming machine that can execute a non-specific operation effect (fourth operation effect or sixth operation effect) that indicates the expected probability of achieving the advantageous gaming state is equal to or lower than the first specific operation effect by operating the non-specific movable body without operating the specific movable body.

In a gaming machine with this configuration, a larger number of movable bodies in an activated state may suggest a higher likelihood of a jackpot being achieved than a smaller number. This prevents the effects of the movable bodies being activated from becoming monotonous, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

Invention D3 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention D2,
The non-specific movable body includes a first non-specific movable body and a second non-specific movable body,
The performance execution means
In the first specific presentation, the gaming machine activates one of the first non-specific movable body and the second non-specific movable body.

Invention D4 is
The gaming machine according to the above-mentioned invention D3,
The performance execution means
This is a gaming machine that is capable of executing a third specific effect (first operating effect) that indicates a higher expectation of achieving the advantageous gaming state than the second specific effect by putting the specific movable body, the first non-specific movable body, and the second non-specific movable body into an operating state.

A gaming machine with this configuration can create a level of expectation commensurate with the impact of the third specific effect, in which multiple movable bodies, whose operating states may overlap, are all activated together. This can increase the player's interest in the game.

Invention D5 is
A gaming machine according to any one of the above-mentioned inventions D1 to D4,
The production means includes a display means (image display device 50) capable of performing a predetermined display on a display unit (display unit 50a),
The performance execution means
In response to the execution of the second specific performance, a specific display (second operation performance display G55) may be displayed on the display means,
In the first specific presentation, the gaming machine does not display the specific display.

This gaming machine can impart a sense of exclusivity to the second specific presentation, which has few moving parts in operation, through the use of special displays. Therefore, even in the second specific presentation, which has few moving parts in operation, it is possible to sufficiently heighten the player's anticipation for a favorable gaming state.

50...image display device 50a...display unit 101...game control microcomputer 121...performance control microcomputer PY1...pachinko game machine (game machine)

Claims (3)

A game control means capable of creating an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player;
A gaming machine equipped with a performance execution means capable of executing a performance using an image display unit capable of displaying a predetermined performance image on a display unit,
The performance execution means
A plurality of symbols are displayed in different regions of the display unit, and then a variable effect of stopping the display can be executed.
During the variation performance, a reach formation performance may be executed in which only one reach is formed by a part of the plurality of symbols,
In the reach formation performance, there are times when a reach line capable of indicating the formation of a reach is displayed in a specific manner and times when it is displayed in a non-specific manner different from the specific manner,
As the reach formation performance,
When a specific reach formation effect is executed in which the reach line of the specific mode is displayed at a position away from the center of the pattern related to the formation of the reach, thereby suggesting a specific expectation level as the expectation level of the advantageous game state;
A gaming machine characterized in that a degree of expectation different from the specific degree of expectation is sometimes suggested by executing a non-specific reach formation effect in which the reach line of the non-specific mode is displayed at a position closer to the center of the pattern related to the formation of a reach than the specific reach formation effect. 2. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The performance execution means
In the specific reach formation presentation, the symbols relating to the formation of a reach can be displayed in a manner different from that in the non-specific reach formation presentation. 3. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
The performance execution means
In the specific reach formation presentation, the display of the reach line is started so as not to overlap with the center of the pattern related to the formation of the reach, and then the pattern related to the formation of the reach can be moved in a direction in which its center approaches the reach line whose display has started.